Nammiaca 000038

I A E

V2500

__________
HIGHLIGHTS
REVISION NO. 57 May 01/08
Pages which have been revised are outlined below, together with the Highlights of the
Revision
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CH/SE/SU C REASON FOR CHANGE EFFECTIVITY
PAGES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHAPTER 70
__________
L.E.P. 1- 3 REVISED TO REFLECT THIS REVISION INDICATING

NEW,REVISED, AND/OR DELETED PAGES
T. OF C. REVISED TO REFLECT THIS REVISION
1- 6
70-11-50 LAYOUT IMPROVED/MATERIAL RELOCATED 001-012, 014-099,
206- 209
70-11-56 CORRECTION/ADDITION/AMPLIFICATION 001-012, 014-099,

201- 205 UPDATED CLEANING REQUIREMENTS PROCEDURE
LAYOUT IMPROVED/MATERIAL RELOCATED 001-012, 014-099,
70-HIGHLIGHTS Page 1 of 1
REVISION NO. 57 May 01/08
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

_______________________
N, R or D indicates pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively
Remove and insert the affected pages and complete the Record of Revisions and
the Record of Temporary Revisions as necessary
CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE
RECORD 70-11-50 202 May01/06 70-23-13 208 May01/06

OF TEMP. 70-11-50 203 Feb01/08 70-23-13 209 May01/06
REVISION 70-11-50 204 Feb01/08 70-23-13 210 May01/06
70-11-50 205 May01/06 70-23-15 201 May01/06
L.E.P. R 1- 3 May01/08 70-11-50 N 206 May01/08 70-23-15 202 May01/06
T. of C. R 1 May01/08 70-11-50 N 207 May01/08 70-23-15 203 May01/06
T. of C. R 4 May01/08 70-11-56 R 201 May01/08
T. of C. R 5 May01/08 70-11-56 R 202 May01/08 70-30-00 201 May01/06
T. of C. R 6 May01/08 70-11-56 R 203 May01/08 70-30-00 202 Nov01/07
70-11-56 R 204 May01/08 70-30-00 203 Nov01/07
70-00-00 1 May01/06 70-11-56 N 205 May01/08 70-30-00 204 Nov01/07
70-00-00 2 May01/06 70-30-00 205 Nov01/07
70-00-00 3 May01/06 70-23-05 201 May01/06 70-30-00 206 Nov01/07
70-00-00 4 May01/06 70-23-05 202 May01/06 70-30-00 207 Feb01/08
70-00-00 5 May01/06 70-23-05 203 May01/06 70-30-00 208 Feb01/08
70-00-00 6 May01/06 70-23-11 201 May01/06 70-30-00 209 Feb01/08
70-00-00 7 May01/06 70-23-11 202 May01/06 70-30-00 210 Feb01/08
70-00-00 8 May01/06 70-23-11 203 May01/06 70-30-00 211 Feb01/08
70-00-00 9 May01/06 70-23-11 204 May01/06 70-30-00 212 Feb01/08
70-00-00 10 May01/06 70-23-11 205 May01/06 70-30-00 213 Feb01/08
70-23-11 206 May01/06 70-30-00 214 Feb01/08
70-11-11 201 May01/06 70-23-11 207 May01/06 70-30-00 215 Feb01/08
70-11-11 202 May01/06 70-23-11 208 May01/06 70-30-00 216 Feb01/08
70-11-11 203 May01/06 70-23-11 209 May01/06 70-30-00 217 Feb01/08
70-11-11 204 May01/06 70-23-11 210 May01/06 70-30-00 218 Feb01/08
70-11-11 205 May01/06 70-23-11 211 May01/06 70-30-00 219 Feb01/08
70-11-11 206 May01/06 70-23-11 212 May01/06 70-30-00 220 Feb01/08
70-11-11 207 May01/06 70-23-11 213 May01/06 70-30-00 221 Feb01/08
70-11-11 208 May01/06 70-23-11 214 May01/06 70-30-00 222 Feb01/08
70-11-11 209 May01/06 70-23-11 215 May01/06 70-30-00 223 Feb01/08
70-11-11 210 May01/06 70-23-12 201 May01/06 70-30-00 224 Feb01/08
70-11-11 211 May01/06 70-23-12 202 May01/06 70-30-00 225 Feb01/08
70-11-11 212 May01/06 70-23-12 203 May01/06 70-30-00 226 Feb01/08
70-11-11 213 May01/06 70-23-13 201 May01/06 70-30-00 227 Feb01/08
70-11-11 214 May01/06 70-23-13 202 May01/06 70-30-00 228 Feb01/08
70-11-11 215 May01/06 70-23-13 203 May01/06 70-30-00 229 Feb01/08
70-11-11 216 May01/06 70-23-13 204 May01/06 70-30-00 230 Feb01/08
70-11-12 201 May01/06 70-23-13 205 May01/06 70-30-00 231 Feb01/08
70-11-12 202 May01/06 70-23-13 206 May01/06 70-30-00 232 Feb01/08
70-11-50 201 Feb01/08 70-23-13 207 May01/06 70-30-00 233 Feb01/08
70-L.E.P. Page 1
May 01/08
IAC

I A E

V2500

70-30-00 234 Feb01/08 70-35-08 810 May01/06 70-40-11 215 May01/06

70-30-00 235 Feb01/08 70-35-08 811 May01/06 70-40-11 216 May01/06
70-30-00 236 Feb01/08 70-35-08 812 May01/06 70-40-11 217 May01/06
70-30-00 237 Nov01/07 70-35-08 813 May01/06 70-40-11 218 May01/06
70-30-00 238 Nov01/07 70-35-08 814 May01/06 70-40-11 219 Feb01/07
70-30-00 239 Nov01/07 70-35-08 815 May01/06 70-40-11 220 May01/06
70-30-00 240 Nov01/07 70-35-08 816 May01/06 70-40-11 221 May01/06
70-30-00 241 Nov01/07 70-35-08 817 May01/06 70-40-11 222 May01/06
70-30-00 242 Nov01/07 70-35-08 818 May01/06 70-40-11 223 Feb01/07
70-30-00 243 Nov01/07 70-35-08 819 May01/06 70-40-11 224 Feb01/07
70-30-00 244 Nov01/07 70-35-08 820 May01/06 70-40-11 225 Feb01/07
70-30-00 245 Nov01/07 70-35-08 821 May01/06 70-40-11 226 Feb01/07
70-30-00 246 Nov01/07 70-35-08 822 May01/06 70-40-11 227 Feb01/07
70-30-00 247 Nov01/07 70-35-08 823 May01/06 70-40-11 228 May01/06
70-30-00 248 Nov01/07 70-35-08 824 May01/06 70-40-11 229 May01/06
70-30-00 249 Nov01/07 70-35-08 825 May01/06 70-40-11 230 May01/06
70-30-00 250 Nov01/07 70-35-08 826 May01/06 70-40-11 231 Feb01/07
70-30-00 251 Nov01/07 70-35-08 827 May01/06
70-30-00 252 Feb01/08 70-35-08 828 May01/06 70-42-11 801 Feb01/07
70-30-00 253 Feb01/08 70-35-08 829 May01/06 70-42-11 802 Feb01/07
70-30-00 254 Feb01/08 70-35-08 830 May01/06 70-42-11 803 Feb01/07
70-30-00 255 Feb01/08 70-35-26 801 May01/06 70-42-11 804 Feb01/07
70-30-00 256 Feb01/08 70-35-26 802 May01/06
70-30-00 257 Feb01/08 70-35-26 803 May01/06 70-52-11 201 May01/06
70-30-00 258 Feb01/08 70-35-26 804 May01/06 70-52-11 202 May01/06
70-30-00 259 Feb01/08 70-35-26 805 May01/06 70-52-11 203 May01/06
70-30-00 260 Feb01/08 70-35-26 806 May01/06 70-52-11 204 May01/06
70-30-00 261 Feb01/08 70-35-26 807 May01/06 70-52-11 205 May01/06
70-30-00 262 Feb01/08 70-35-26 808 May01/06 70-52-11 206 May01/06
70-30-00 263 Feb01/08 70-35-26 809 May01/06 70-52-11 207 May01/06
70-30-00 264 Feb01/08 70-35-26 810 May01/06 70-52-11 208 May01/06
70-30-00 265 Feb01/08 70-35-26 811 May01/06 70-52-11 209 May01/06
70-30-00 266 Feb01/08 70-35-26 812 May01/06 70-52-11 210 May01/06
70-30-00 267 Feb01/08 70-35-26 813 May01/06 70-52-11 211 May01/06
70-30-00 268 Feb01/08 70-35-26 814 May01/06 70-52-11 212 May01/06
70-30-00 269 Feb01/08 70-35-26 815 May01/06 70-52-11 213 May01/06
70-30-00 270 Feb01/08 70-52-11 214 May01/06
70-30-00 271 Feb01/08 70-40-11 201 Feb01/07 70-52-11 215 May01/06
70-30-00 272 Feb01/08 70-40-11 202 May01/06 70-52-11 216 May01/06
70-30-00 273 Feb01/08 70-40-11 203 May01/06 70-52-11 217 May01/06
70-30-00 274 Feb01/08 70-40-11 204 May01/06 70-52-11 218 May01/06
70-40-11 205 May01/06 70-52-11 219 May01/06
70-35-08 801 May01/06 70-40-11 206 May01/06 70-52-11 220 May01/06
70-35-08 802 May01/06 70-40-11 207 May01/06 70-52-11 221 May01/06
70-35-08 803 May01/06 70-40-11 208 May01/06 70-52-11 222 May01/06
70-35-08 804 May01/06 70-40-11 209 May01/06 70-52-11 223 May01/06
70-35-08 805 May01/06 70-40-11 210 May01/06 70-52-11 224 May01/06
70-35-08 806 May01/06 70-40-11 211 May01/06 70-52-11 225 May01/06
70-35-08 807 May01/06 70-40-11 212 May01/06 70-52-11 226 May01/06
70-35-08 808 May01/06 70-40-11 213 May01/06 70-52-11 227 May01/06
70-35-08 809 May01/06 70-40-11 214 May01/06 70-52-11 228 May01/06
70-L.E.P. Page 2
May 01/08
IAC

I A E

V2500

70-52-11 229 May01/06 70-71-12 11 May01/06 70-71-21 12 May01/06

70-52-11 230 May01/06 70-71-12 12 May01/06 70-71-21 13 May01/06
70-52-11 231 May01/06 70-71-12 13 May01/06 70-71-21 14 May01/06
70-52-11 232 May01/06 70-71-12 14 May01/06 70-71-21 15 May01/06
70-52-11 233 May01/06 70-71-12 15 May01/06 70-71-22 1 May01/06
70-52-11 234 May01/06 70-71-12 16 May01/06 70-71-22 2 May01/06
70-52-11 235 May01/06 70-71-12 17 May01/06 70-71-23 1 May01/06
70-52-11 236 May01/06 70-71-12 18 May01/06 70-71-23 2 May01/06
70-52-11 237 May01/06 70-71-12 19 May01/06 70-71-23 3 May01/06
70-52-11 238 May01/06 70-71-12 20 May01/06 70-71-23 4 May01/06
70-52-11 239 May01/06 70-71-12 21 May01/06 70-71-23 5 May01/06
70-52-11 240 May01/06 70-71-13 1 May01/06 70-71-23 6 May01/06
70-52-11 241 May01/06 70-71-13 2 May01/06 70-71-23 7 May01/06
70-52-11 242 May01/06 70-71-13 3 May01/06 70-71-23 8 May01/06
70-52-11 243 May01/06 70-71-13 4 May01/06 70-71-23 9 May01/06
70-52-11 244 May01/06 70-71-13 5 May01/06 70-71-23 10 May01/06
70-52-11 245 May01/06 70-71-13 6 May01/06 70-71-23 11 May01/06
70-52-11 246 May01/06 70-71-13 7 May01/06 70-71-23 12 May01/06
70-52-11 247 May01/06 70-71-13 8 May01/06 70-71-23 13 May01/06
70-52-11 248 May01/06 70-71-14 1 May01/06 70-71-23 14 May01/06
70-52-11 249 May01/06 70-71-14 2 May01/06 70-71-24 1 May01/06
70-52-11 250 May01/06 70-71-14 3 May01/06 70-71-24 2 May01/06
70-52-11 251 May01/06 70-71-14 4 May01/06 70-71-24 3 May01/06
70-52-11 252 May01/06 70-71-14 5 May01/06 70-71-24 4 May01/06
70-52-11 253 May01/06 70-71-14 6 May01/06 70-71-24 5 May01/06
70-52-11 254 May01/06 70-71-14 7 May01/06 70-71-24 6 May01/06
70-52-11 255 May01/06 70-71-14 8 May01/06 70-71-24 7 May01/06
70-52-11 256 May01/06 70-71-14 9 May01/06 70-71-24 8 May01/06
70-52-11 257 May01/06 70-71-14 10 May01/06 70-71-24 9 May01/06
70-71-20 1 May01/06 70-71-24 10 May01/06
70-71-00 1 May01/06 70-71-20 2 May01/06 70-71-24 11 May01/06
70-71-00 2 May01/06 70-71-20 3 May01/06 70-71-24 12 May01/06
70-71-01 1 May01/06 70-71-20 4 May01/06 70-71-24 13 May01/06
70-71-01 2 May01/06 70-71-20 5 May01/06 70-71-24 14 May01/06
70-71-01 3 May01/06 70-71-20 6 May01/06 70-71-24 15 May01/06
70-71-02 1 May01/06 70-71-20 7 May01/06 70-71-25 1 Nov01/07
70-71-02 2 May01/06 70-71-20 8 May01/06 70-71-25 2 May01/06
70-71-02 3 May01/06 70-71-20 9 May01/06 70-71-25 3 May01/06
70-71-02 4 May01/06 70-71-20 10 May01/06 70-71-25 4 May01/06
70-71-02 5 May01/06 70-71-20 11 May01/06 70-71-25 5 May01/06
70-71-02 6 May01/06 70-71-21 1 May01/07 70-71-25 6 May01/06
70-71-12 1 May01/06 70-71-21 2 May01/06 70-71-25 7 May01/06
70-71-12 2 May01/06 70-71-21 3 May01/06 70-71-25 8 May01/06
70-71-12 3 May01/06 70-71-21 4 May01/06 70-71-25 9 May01/06
70-71-12 4 May01/06 70-71-21 5 May01/06 70-71-26 1 Aug01/07
70-71-12 5 May01/06 70-71-21 6 May01/06 70-71-26 2 Aug01/07
70-71-12 6 May01/06 70-71-21 7 May01/06 70-71-26 3 Aug01/07
70-71-12 7 May01/06 70-71-21 8 May01/06 70-71-26 4 Aug01/07
70-71-12 8 May01/06 70-71-21 9 May01/06 70-71-26 5 Aug01/07
70-71-12 9 May01/06 70-71-21 10 May01/06
70-71-12 10 May01/06 70-71-21 11 May01/06
70-L.E.P. Page 3
May 01/08
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
_______
SUBJECT ________
CH/SE/SU C
_ PAGE ___________
____ EFFECTIVITY
STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE - GENERAL
_____________________________________ 70-00-00
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION 1 001-012, 014-099
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Related Data 1 001-012, 014-099
Welding 4 001-012, 014-099
List of VRS (V2500 Repair 4 001-012, 014-099
Scheme) used in AMM
SPECIAL HANDLING OF SOLUTIONS 70-11-11
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 201 001-012, 014-099
Special Handling of Solutions 201 001-012, 014-099
SPECIAL HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND 70-11-12
SOLUTIONS
Special Handling of Materials 201 001-012, 014-099
CHEMICAL CLEANING 70-11-50
Remove Grease from the External 201 001-012, 014-099
Surfaces of the Engine
Cleaning of Contact Points and 206 001-012, 014-099
Wiring Harnesses
CHEMICAL CLEANING 70-11-56
Cleaning Requirements After 201 001-012, 014-099
Chemical Contact with Fire
Extinguinshing Agents, Hydraulic
Fluid, Oil, or Fuel
PENETRANT INSPECTION 70-23-05
Local Application of Fluorescent 201 001-012, 014-099
Penetrant Inspection
TORQUE TIGHTENING TECHNIQUE 70-23-11
General Torque Tightening 201 001-012, 014-099
Techniques
The Procedure to Use Torque 204 001-012, 014-099
Wrenches and Power Tools
Check for Re-use of Self-Locking 210 001-012, 014-099
Fasteners
PENETRANT INSPECTION 70-23-12
Local Application of Fluorescent 201 001-012, 014-099
Penetrant Inspection
INSTALLATION OF PREFORMED PACKINGS 70-23-13
Procedures for the Installation of 201 001-012, 014-099
Preformed Packings
70-CONTENTS Page 1
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
_______
SUBJECT CH/SE/SU
________ C
_ ____ ___________
PAGE EFFECTIVITY
Storage of Flexible Rings, Hoses 206 001-012, 014-099
and Rubber Components
ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS 70-23-15
Connection of Electrical 201 001-012, 014-099
Connectors
_________________
LIST OF MATERIALS 70-30-00
Consumable Materials Index 201 001-012, 014-099
WIRE THREAD INSERTS 70-35-08
REPAIRS 801 001-012, 014-099
Install and Repair Wire Thread 801 001-012, 014-099
Inserts
THINWALL SELF LOCK INSERTS 70-35-26
REPAIRS 801 001-012, 014-099
Replace Damaged Thinwall Self Lock 801 001-012, 014-099
Inserts
INSTALLATION OF LOCKING DEVICES 70-40-11
Locking Devices General 201 001-012, 014-099
Information
General Instructions for Uses of 202 001-012, 014-099
Safety Cable
Installation of the Tab-type Key 212 001-012, 014-099
Washers
Installation of Cupwashers 217 001-012, 014-099
General Instructions for the Uses 224 001-012, 014-099
of Lockwire
REPAIR OF SURFACES AFFECTED BY MINOR 70-42-11
DAMAGE
REPAIRS 801 001-012, 014-099
Hand Polish and Blend Procedure 801 001-012, 014-099
DEFINITION OF DAMAGES 70-52-11
Specified Types of Damage 201 001-012, 014-099
POWER PLANT WIRING STANDARD PRACTICES - 70-71-00

ATA INDEX
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Repair effectivity 2 001-012, 014-099
GENERAL - POWER PLANT 70-71-01
V2500 POWER PLANT 1 001-012, 014-099
General 1 001-012, 014-099
70-CONTENTS Page 2
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
_______
SUBJECT ________
CH/SE/SU C
_ PAGE ___________
____ EFFECTIVITY
VENDOR CODES, NAMES AND ADDRESSES 70-71-02
General 1 001-012, 014-099
CONNECTOR/INSERT ARRANGEMENT 70-71-12
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Description 1 001-012, 014-099
Insert Arrangement 1 001-012, 014-099
ASN E0444/0442 Connectors 2 001-012, 014-099
BSK Connectors 5 001-012, 014-099
D38999 Connectors 9 001-012, 014-099
T3K Connectors 11 001-012, 014-099
M83723 Connectors 15 001-012, 014-099
892 Connectors 17 001-012, 014-099
981 Connectors 19 001-012, 014-099
The ESC10 connector sreies agree 19 001-012, 014-099
to MIL-C-83723 Series III K
connector.
Example of a identification code 19 001-012, 014-099
is ESC10KE0203P60:
BACKSHELL LOCKWIRE PROCEDURE 70-71-13
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Standard equipment 1 001-012, 014-099
Consumable material 1 001-012, 014-099
Standard Practices for Lockwires 1 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 1 001-012, 014-099
Backshell Lockwire Procedures 2 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 2 001-012, 014-099
WIRE HARNESS LACING PROCEDURE 70-71-14
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Standard Equipment 1 001-012, 014-099
Consumable Material 1 001-012, 014-099
Standard Practices for Wire 1 001-012, 014-099
Harness Lacing
Procedure 1 001-012, 014-099
General Lacing 3 001-012, 014-099
Lacing with Two Wire Bundles 3 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 3 001-012, 014-099
Lacing with Three Wire Bundles 7 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 7 001-012, 014-099
Lacing a Clamp Position on a 9 001-012, 014-099
Harness Assembly.
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
CONNECTOR, CONTACT AND BACKSHELL 70-71-20
70-CONTENTS Page 3
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
_______
SUBJECT CH/SE/SU
________ C
_ PAGE ___________
____ EFFECTIVITY
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Removal of the Backshell from the 2 001-012, 014-099
Connector
Procedure 2 001-012, 014-099
Removal of the Contacts from the 4 001-012, 014-099
Connector
Procedure 4 001-012, 014-099
Replacement of the Connector or 4 001-012, 014-099
Backshell
Installation of the Contacts into 6 001-012, 014-099
the Connector
Procedure 6 001-012, 014-099
Contact Retention Test 8 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 8 001-012, 014-099
Installation of the Backshell to 9 001-012, 014-099
the Connector
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
Backshell Continuity Test 10 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 10 001-012, 014-099
Insulation Resistance Test 10 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 10 001-012, 014-099
CONTACT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 70-71-21
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Removal of the Backshell from the 2 001-012, 014-099
Connector
Procedure 2 001-012, 014-099
Removal of the Contacts from the 5 001-012, 014-099
Connector
Procedure 5 001-012, 014-099
Wire Preparation 6 001-012, 014-099
Striping of the Wire 6 001-012, 014-099
Crimping of the Contact 6 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 6 001-012, 014-099
Contact Continuity Test 9 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
Install the Contact into the 9 001-012, 014-099
Connector
70-CONTENTS Page 4
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
SUBJECT
_______ CH/SE/SU
________ C
_ ____ ___________
PAGE EFFECTIVITY
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
Contact Retention Test 11 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 11 001-012, 014-099
Installation of the Backshell to 12 001-012, 014-099
the Connector
Procedure 12 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 13 001-012, 014-099
Insulation Resistance Test 14 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 14 001-012, 014-099
Safetying of the Backshell 15 001-012, 014-099
WIRE INSULATION REPAIR PROCEDURE 70-71-22
Wire Insulation Repair Procedure 1 001-012, 014-099
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Shielded Wire Repair With No 1 001-012, 014-099
Splice
Procedure 1 001-012, 014-099
WIRE SPLICE REPAIR PROCEDURE 70-71-23
Wire Splice Repair Procedure 1 001-012, 014-099
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Consumable material 2 001-012, 014-099
Wire Harness Splice Repair Limits. 3 001-012, 014-099
General 3 001-012, 014-099
Unshielded Wire Repair 4 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 4 001-012, 014-099
Shielded Wire Repair 8 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 8 001-012, 014-099
SHIELDED WIRE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 70-71-24
Shielded Wire Replacement 1 001-012, 014-099
Procedure
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Shielded Wire Replacement 3 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 3 001-012, 014-099
EGT, T2.6 AND T3 ELECTRICAL HARNESSES 70-71-25
TERMINAL LUG REPAIR PROCEDURE
General 1 001-012, 014-099
70-CONTENTS Page 5
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

CHAPTER 70
__________
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
_______
SUBJECT CH/SE/SU
________ C
_ ____ ___________
PAGE EFFECTIVITY
Consumable Material. 2 001-012, 014-099
Replacement of the Damaged 2 001-012, 014-099
Exhaust-Gas Temperature (EGT) or
T3 Electrical-harness Terminal
Lugs.
Procedure 2 001-012, 014-099
Replacement of the Damaged T2.6 5 001-012, 014-099
Electrical-Harness Terminal Lugs
Procedure 5 001-012, 014-099
Fuel Vapor Test 6 001-012, 014-099
Insulation of the Terminal Lug 6 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 6 001-012, 014-099
Testing of the Repaired Circuit 9 001-012, 014-099
Procedure 9 001-012, 014-099
TERMINAL LUG REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 70-71-26
General 1 001-012, 014-099
Replacement of the 2 001-012, 014-099
Electrical-Harness Terminal Lugs
Procedure 2 001-012, 014-099
70-CONTENTS Page 6
May 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________________________________________________
1. _______
General
This section contains the maintenance operations that can be done with the
engine installed on the aircraft.
A. Related Data
(1) Data related to the on-aircraft maintenance of the propulsion system

includes the following:
(a) Troubleshooting (Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual).
(b) Maintenance Practices.
(c) Servicing.
(d) Removal/Installation of Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) and of the

Powerplant.
(e) Adjustment/Test.
(f) Inspection/Check.
(g) Cleaning/Painting.
(h) Approved Repairs.
(2) The chapter numbers and designations used are as follows:
(a) 05-Time Limits.
(b) 06-Dimensions and Areas.
(c) 11-Placards and Markings.
(d) 12-Servicing.
(e) 23-Communications.
(f) 24-Electrical Power.
(g) 26-Fire Protection.
(h) 29-Hydraulic Power.
(i) 30-Ice and Rain Protection.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(j) 36-Pneumatic.
(k) 54-Nacelles and Pylons.
(l) 70-Standard Practices - Engines.
(m) 71-Power Plant.
(n) 72-Engine.
(o) 73-Engine Fuel and Control.
(p) 74-Ignition.
(q) 75-Air.
(r) 76-Engine Controls.
(s) 77-Engine Indicating.
(t) 78-Exhaust.
(u) 79-Oil.
(v) 80-Starting.
(3) Data that refers to location, description and operation of the

engine, its components and systems is also included.
(4) Data related to safety procedures, standard on-aircraft procedures

and WARNING/CAUTION notices must be followed to prevent injury to
persons and damage to equipment.
(5) Related Publications
(6) The publications listed as follows are connected to and used with
this manual:
(a) Propulsion System Operating Instructions (Refer to Flight Crew

Operating Manual).
(b) Aircraft Plant Illustrated Parts Catalog (AIPC) - The Illustrated

Parts Catalog identifies and illustrates also those Engine,
Nacelle and Thrust Reverser parts that are likely to be
removed/installed while the Propulsion System is mounted on the
aircraft. It is only to be used for the order, storage, issue and
identification of parts. It is not to be used as the authority

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

for procedures of disassembly or assembly. The AIPC is also a
historical record (by the Service Bulletin standard) of the parts
used, superseded and/or discontinued.
(c) Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual (Refer to Illustrated Tool

and Equipment Manual) - The Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual
gives data on the special tools and equipment necessary for the
engine. The tools and equipment are illustrated together with a
description of purpose and usage.
(d) Non-Destructive Test Manual (Refer to NDT).
(e) Engine Manual - The engine manual does not relate directly to the
on-aircraft maintenance of the engine, but it does contain the
data necessary for work to be completed on an engine in the
workshop.
(f) IAE - Component Maintenance Manuals - These four manuals

(Tubes/Hoses/Ducts, Miscellaneous Mechanical, Electrical Harness
and Cables, Fuel Nozzle and Support) are related to the Engine
Manual and contain data for work to be accomplished in the
workshop.
(g) Wiring Data (Refer to ESPM) - The Electrical Standard Practices

Manual provides data necessary for support of the various
electrical cables and harnesses that are installed on the
Propulsion System.
(h) Vendor Component Maintenance Manuals - The various Vendor

Component Maintenance Manuals, which cover the proprietary
components/accessories that are installed in the Propulsion
System, contain data for work to be accomplished in the workshop.
A complete listing of these Vendor Component Maintenance Manuals
is contained in the: TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS AND LIST OF
OVERHAULABLE COMPONENTS (TPI/LOC).
(i) Engine/Nacelle Service Bulletins - Engine Service Bulletins

(V2500-ENG) and Nacelle Service Bulletins (V2500-NAC) are issued
to provide instructions for the advancement of a configuration or
for the accomplishment of a one-time inspection, etc.
(7) Engine Area Identification
(8) Clock position, left, right and other direction instructions refer to
an engine in a horizontal position, viewed from the rear and with the
engine mounts at the top.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(9) Engine Consumable Product
(10) All the engine consumable products are included in the chapter
70-30-00. The national reference of products is not mandatory in the
AMM and when this reference is unknown it must be replaced by *.
B. Welding
WARNING : THE AIRCRAFT AND ENGINE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND THAT YOU DO NOT
WELD ENGINE COMPONENTS WHEN THE ENGINE IS INSTALLED ON THE
AIRFRAME.
ALL THE WELD REPAIRS GIVEN BY THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER ARE FOR
ENGINES OR COMPONENTS IN A WORKSHOP. THERE IS A FIRE RISK IF YOU
WELD ON AN INSTALLED ENGINE BECAUSE OF THE FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS IN
THIS AREA.
C. List of VRS (V2500 Repair Scheme) used in AMM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS No. TITLE CH-SE-SU PAGE
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS1006 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADES 72-31-11 801
VRS1011 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR ANNULUS 72-31-11 801

FILLERS

FILLERS - REPAIR
VRS1020 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADES 72-31-11 801
VRS1030 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADE 72-31-11 801

TOUCH UP COATING
VRS1058 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR BLADES AND 72-31-11 801

FILLERS
VRS1063 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADE 72-31-11 801

CHOCKING PADS
VRS1065 REPAIR LEADING EDGE EROSION AND THE LP 72-31-11 801

COMPRESSOR ROTOR BLADES BY MATERIAL
REMOVAL
VRS1113 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR 72-31-11 801

ANNULUS FILLERS - REPAIR

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS1163 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FRONT BLADE 72-31-13 801
RETAINING RING
VRS1148 REPLACEMENT OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK REAR 72-31-12 801

RAMP
VRS1149 REPAIR OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK TOUCH UP 72-31-12 801

COATING
VRS1174 REPLACEMENT OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK 72-31-12 801

SHANK NUT
VRS1175 REPLACEMENT OF THE SHANK NUTS OF THE 72-31-13 801

FRONT BLADE RETAINING RING
VRS1290 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR STUB SHAFT 72-32-51 801
VRS1405 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE 72-32-85 801
VRS1408 LOCAL REPAIR OF ACOUSTIC LINING 72-32-85 801
VRS1411 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ATTRITION LINING 72-32-85 801

DOWN TO THE GRP LAYER
VRS1421 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR OUTLET 72-32-88 801

GUIDE VANES
VRS1428 REPAIR OF ACOUSTIC LININGS 72-32-89 801
VRS1432 REPAIR OF THE INLET CONE 72-38-11 801
VRS1438 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR INLET 72-32-91 801

GUIDE VANES
VRS1439 REPAIR OF THE SPLITTER FAIRING 72-32-91 801
VRS1443 REPAIR OF THE SPLITTER FAIRING 72-32-91 801
VRS1511 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ACOUSTIC 72-32-85 801

LININGS BY BONDING
VRS1506 REPAIR DAMAGE ON THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN 72-31-11 801

BLADES BY LOCAL MATERIAL REMOVAL

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS1550 REPLACE THE ROD END OF THE HP/LP 75-24-51 801

TURBINE ACC AIR VALVE
VRS1551 REPLACE THE ROD END OF THE HPT/LPT 75-24-52 801

ACC VALVE ACTUATOR (4027KS)
VRS1558 REPAIR BY REPLACEMENT OF THE 75-32-85 801

ATTRIBUTION LININGS
VRS1561 REPAIR OF THE BLUE FILLER - 72-32-85 801

POST SBE 72-0103
VRS1563 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ATTRIBUTION 72-32-85 801

LINING BELOW THE GRC LAYER

LINING BELOW THE GRC LAYER

LINING DOWN TO THE GRC LAYER
VRS1572 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ANTI-ICE 72-32-85 801

IMPACT LININGS
VRS1573 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ACOUSTIC 72-32-85 801

LININGS

ANTI-ICE IMPACT PANELS

ACOUSTIC LININGS

FRONT ATTRIBUTION LININGS

REAR ATTRIBUTION LININGS

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LINING DOWN TO THE GRC LAYER
VRS1580 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ANTI-ICE IMPACT 72-32-85 801

PANELS
VRS1581 LOCAL REPAIR OF THE LINING 72-32-85 801

ACOUSTIC LININGS
VRS1596 FAN FRAME TERMINAL ASSEMBLY T2.5CM 72-32-03 801

REPLACEMENT
VRS1714 REPAIR OF THE INLET CONE FAIRING 72-38-11 801
VRS1715 REPAIR OF THE FRONT FAIRING 72-32-93 801
VRS1731 REPAIR OF THE FAN FRAME ASSEMBLY 72-32-03 801
VRS1802 REPAIR THE CRACK IN THE FAN CASE 72-32-87 801

LINER PANEL

FILLERS

FILLERS
VRS1817 REPAIR OF THE FAN EXIT VANE 72-32-88 801

ASSEMBLY
VRS1952 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE ANTI ICE 72-32-85 801

IMPACT LININGS
VRS1955 REPAIR BY REPLACING THE FRONT LINING 72-32-85 801
VRS1956 REPAIR BY REPLACING THE REAR LINING 72-32-85 801

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS1958 REPAIR BY REPLACING THE ACOUSTIC 72-32-85 801

LINING
VRS1959 REPAIR BY REMPLACING THE FRONT PANEL, 72-32-85 801

MIDDLE PANEL AND REAR PANEL
VRS2001 REPAIR OF HEATSHIELD - LEFT C-DUCT 78-32-49 801

FIXED STRUCTURE
VRS2002 REPAIR OF HEATSHIELD - RIGHT C-DUCT 78-32-79 801

FIXED STRUCTURE
VRS2053 REPLACEMENT OF THE LOWER TRACK SEAL/ 78-32-49 801

RETAINER - LEFT THRUST REVERSER
VRS2054 REPLACEMENT OF THE LOWER TRACK SEAL/ 78-32-79 801

RETAINER - RIGHT THRUST REVERSER
VRS2055 REPLACEMENT OF THE COMMON NOZZLE 78-11-11 801

OUTER DUCT SEAL
VRS2059 REPLACEMENT OF THE COMMON NOZZLE INNER 78-11-11 801

DUCT SEALS AND RETAINERS
VRS2070 REPLACEMENT OF THE RIGHT TRANSLATING 78-32-76 801

COWL SEALS
VRS2071 REPLACEMENT OF THE LEFT TRANSLATING 78-32-46 801

COWL SEALS
VRS2076 REPLACEMENT OF THE PRESSURE SEAL - 78-32-79 801

RIGHT THRUST REVERSER
VRS2078 REPLACEMENT OF THE SEAL - RIGHT 78-32-79 801

C-DUCT FIXED STRUCTURE
VRS2079 REPLACEMENT OF THE SEAL - LEFT 78-32-49 801

C-DUCT FIXED STRUCTURE
VRS2118 REPLACEMENT OF THE HINGE ACCESS PANEL 78-32-79 801

SEAL/RETAINER - RIGHT THRUST REVERSER

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VRS2119 REPLACEMENT OF THE HINGE ACCESS PANEL 78-32-49 801
SEAL/RETAINER - LEFT THRUST REVERSER
VRS2278 BLEND REPAIR OF THE LEFT THRUST 78-11-11 801

REVERSER BLOCKER DOOR DRAG LINK SURFACE
DAMAGE
VRS2279 BLEND REPAIR OF THE LEFT THRUST 78-32-45 801

REVERSER BLOCKER DOOR SURFACE DAMAGE
VRS2280 BLEND REPAIR OF THE RIGHT THRUST 78-32-72 801

REVERSER BLOCKER DOOR DRAG LINK SURFACE
DAMAGE
VRS2281 BLEND REPAIR OF THE RIGHT THRUST 78-32-75 801

REVERSER BLOCKER DOOR SURFACE DAMAGE
VRS2725 REPLACE THE AERODYNAMIC SEALANT ON 73-22-11 801

THE AIR INTAKE COWL OR THE P2/T2
SENSOR
VRS2733 REPLACE THE IDENTIFICATION MARKS ON 71-11-11 801

THE NOSE COWL

THE LEFT FAN COWL DOOR

THE OIL FILLER DOOR/CHIP DETECTOR DOOR

THE RIGHT FAN COWL DOOR
VRS2737 REPLACE THE IDENTIFICATION MARKS ON THE 71-13-17 801

AIR STARTER DOOR
VRS2741 REPLACE THE HI-LOK FASTENERS ON THE 71-13-14 801

OIL FILLER DOOR OVERSIZE FASTENERS
VRS2804 REPLACE THE SEAL ON THE THERMAL ANTI- 71-11-11 801

ICING OUTLET PANEL
VRS2825 REPLACE THERMAL ANTI-ICING OUTLET 71-11-11 801

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BLOCK
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GRILLE
VRS2849 REPLACE THE HINGE ON THE OIL FILLER 71-13-14 801

ACCESS DOOR
VRS2934 REPLACE A CAPTIVE NUT ON THE ATTACH 71-11-11 801

RING
VRS2935 HAND BLEND AND POLISH DAMAGE ON THE 71-13-14 801

ACCESS PANEL HINGE
VRS3500 REPLACE THE JUMPERS, CONTACTS OR 73-22-35 801

CONNECTOR
VRS3501 REPAIR THE JUMPER CONTACT OR CONTACT 73-22-35 801
VRS3503 REPLACE THE DATA ENTRY PLUG BACKSHELL 73-22-35 801

ASSEMBLY
VRS6514 REPAIR DAMAGED HELICOIL INSERT(S) IN 72-41-31 801

THE HP COMPRESSOR, FRONT CASE
ASSEMBLY, BY REPLACEMENT
VRS6637 REPAIR DAMAGED HELICOIL INSERT(S) IN 72-41-23 801

THE HP COMPRESSOR, REAR OUTER CASE
ASSEMBLY, BY REPLACEMENT
R
R VRS6669 REPAIR RUBBER SEAL OF THE DISCONNECT 72-38-25 801
R PANEL BY REPLACEMENT OF THE LOWER
R SEAL AND CLIP
R

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-00-00

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

SPECIAL HANDLING OF SOLUTIONS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_____________________________________________________
TASK 70-11-11-670-011
Special Handling of Solutions
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
Job Set-up Information
Not Applicable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-11-11-869-050
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-11-11-869-051
A. General
Aviation materials are not dangerous to health when used correctly for
their specified use and with good industrial and personal hygiene. If as
the result of an accident or incorrect use, different health risks can
occur.
This standard practice refers to these health risks and the precautions
which must be followed to keep them to a minimum. Also the procedure that
must be followed to help with medical conditions that can occur.
This Standard Practice is divided in to three parts.
(1) Fire hazards.

Health an emergency treatment.
The materials and their related health and safety groups.
(2) Fire hazards

This information is to help users of aviation materials. It must not
replace local regulations.
(a) Flash point groups

Aviation materials which are liquid are grouped in relation to
their closed cup flash points. These closed cup flash points are
agreed by the Institute of Petroleum in their 1978 Marketing

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Safety Code. The Safety Code gives information for the safety in
the supply, storage and movement of aviation material.
The groups are as follows:
Class 1
Class 1 materials have a closed cup flash point below 70 deg.F
(21 deg.C). They must be kept and moved as referred to in the
local regulations for highly flammable liquids. They must be kept
away from all sources of ignition. The electrical equipment used
must have the approval of the Institute of Petroleum Electrical
Safety Code or its local equivalent.
Class 2
Class 2 materials have a closed cup flash point from 70 deg.F (21
deg.C) to 131 deg.F (55 deg.C). They are flammable materials
which must be kept in closed containers and away from all sources
of ignition. The electrical equipment used must have the approval
of the Institute of Petroleum Electrical Safety Code or its local
equivalent.
Class 3
Class 3 materials have a closed cup flash point above 131 deg.F
(55 deg.C) up to 212 deg.F (100 deg.C).
Unclassified
Unclassified materials have a close cup flash point above 212
deg.F (100 deg.C).
(b) To extinguish a fire

If a fire occurs you must use dry chemical or foam extinguishers.
Water must only be used as a spray to give protection and/or to
cool adjacent tanks. A fire near the aviation material can cause
toxic gases because of thermal decomposition.
(c) Leakage of material or discarded material

The primary problem is to prevent a fire or explosion. Leakage
must be contained and isolated from all sources of ignition and
persons.
Water courses and drainage systems must have protection to
prevent contamination.
The material, because of leakage, must be removed with the use of
absorbents, such as sand or keiselguhur. It must then be kept in
the correct containers in a safe area which is open to the air.
The absorbents must be discarded by the use of conditions
approved by the local authority.
The used oil and not used new oil must be discarded by the
conditions approved by the local authority. This is so that they
do not contaminate water courses and drainage systems.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Health and Emergency Treatment
(a) Toxicity terminology

Toxicity is the cause of a material to give bad effects when it
gets on or in to the body.
(b) Acute and Chronic effects

Acute effects are the effects that quickly follow exposure (in a
time measured in seconds, minutes or hours).
Chronic effects are the effects from a long exposure or a
sequence of exposures (in a time measured in days, months or
years).
Acute and Chronic effects can be divided in to two effects:
1
_ Local effects - Occurs at the point of touch with the body
(irritation of the skin).
2
_ Systemic effects - Occurs in parts of the body away from the
point of touch with the body (unconsciousness after gases have
been breathed).
(c) Ingestion
If a liquid is drunk it can cause local irritation of the mouth
and gastrointestinal tract, or systemic effect when it is soaked
in to the bloodstream.
(d) Inhalation
If gases are breathed in to the lungs it can cause local
irritation of the respiratory tract, or systemic effect when it
is soaked in to the bloodstream.
(e) Aspiration
Aspiration is when a liquid gets in to the lungs. Liquid fuels
such as gasolene or kerosene can cause bad pneumonitis if they
are aspirated. Aspiration can occur if vomiting occurs after the
liquid has got in to the lungs, especially if the patient is
unconscious or semi-conscious.
(f) Skin and eye contact

If liquids touch the skin or eyes irritation can occur. Most
liquid and fuel lubricants will defat and dry the skin, this will
cause dermatitis if this occurs frequently.
(g) Hygiene standards

Hygiene standards which are the Threshold Limit Values (TLV) are
set annually by the American Conference of Government Industrial
Hygienists. They recommend the airborne concentrations of

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

substances in a work environment which workers can be exposed to
without any effects. The standard was done to give an aid for the
set up of an accepted work environment. The standard does not
give the toxicity or the included risk or hazard.
For most materials, hygiene standards are given as Time Weighted
Average (TWA) concentration limits for an eight hour day of work.
For some a limit is given and it must not be more or less than
the given limit, unless an added short-term (15 minutes) exposure
limit, written as C and STEL, is given. Hygiene standards are
usually given as parts of a gas for each million parts of
contaminated air by volume (ppm) at 77 deg.F (25 deg.C) and 760
mm Hg pressure of milligrams of substance for each cubic metre of
air (mg/cubic metre).
(h) Preventive measures
1
_ Ingestion
Ingeston of materials as given in this standard practice does
not usually occur in industry and is not usually accidental.
Aspiration before or after ingestion of gasolene or kerosene
can be dangerous.
2
_ Inhalation
Inhalation of gases must be prevented as much as possible and,
where applicable, hygiene standards must be carefully obeyed.
Good local and general clean air must be supplied if
necessary.
3
_ Skin contact
Fuels and lubricating oils of different types which touch the
skin is usual in industry. The effects can be prevented by
good industrial and personal hygiene procedures such as:
The use of protective clothing and the frequent dry-cleaning
of them.
The use of disposable wipers (oil contaminated rags or tools
must never be kept in protective clothing pockets).
The use of good washing facilities must be available with hot
and cold water. Medically approved hand-cleaners and clean
towels (barrier creams and reconditioning creams can be of
help).
(i) Health aspects and emergency treatment
1
_ Aviation materials are divided in to four groups which refer
to the composition and physical properties. Each group is then
divided in to groups which refer to their health hazards.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2
_ Many aviation fuels contain additives. Because the
concentrations of the additives, which are in the fuel, are
small and the minimum time they touch the skin, the additives
in fuels do not cause a health hazard (although the additives,
when isolated, can be highly toxic).
3
_ Used materials are more dangerous than new materials. It is
necessary to be more careful in the movement and the discard
of the material. Also care has to be taken with components
that touch the material.
4
_ The four groups in to which aviation materials are divided are
as follows:
Group A. - Gasolenes
Group B. - Kerosenes
Group C. - Aviation oils
Group D. - Methanol mixtures
(4) Group A. - Aviation Gasolenes

Gasolenes must not be used as an agent that cleans or as alternative
for other solutions.
(a) Health aspects:
1
_ Ingestion
This will not usually kill adults, because the taste and smell
limit the quantity that can be drunk.
There can be irritation of the mouth, throat and digestive
tract.
Larger amounts can result in drowsiness or uncounsciousness.
2
_ Inhalation
The concentrations of aviation gasolene gases in the work
environment must be kept below an average of 300 ppm. At
higher levels the exposure time will change the effects
caused. The effects will be different for each person. As an
aid, concentrations of 1000 to 2000 ppm will cause irritation
to the eyes, nose and throat, and can give the symptoms the
same as drunkeness.
Concentrations of above 5000 ppm is highly dangerous and will
result in unconsciousness quickly.
3
_ Aspiration
Gasolenes are dangerous for aspiration. Aspiration of very
small quantities can quickly cause dangerous pneumonitis. A
quantity of at least one hundredth of the danger dose if
aspirated by the mouth can kill.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4
_ Skin and eye contact
Gasolenes are primary skin irritants that defat and dry the
skin and cause dermatitis. If the skin touches fuel for long
lengths of time, skin lesions (gasolene burns) will occur.
Moderately high quantities of gasolene in to the eyes will
cause smarting of the eyes but it is usually only a transient
disturbance.
(b) Specially hazardous circumstances:
1
_ Gasolene leakages
When gasolene leaks in a confined space, dangerously high
concentrations of gases are caused. The precautions must be
followed to prevent the dangerous effects of inhalation, if a
leakage occurs.
2
_ Clean the gasolene tank
Special precautions must be followed during maintenance or the
operations to clean gasolene storage tanks.
Special precautions must also be followed when the sludge is
removed or is discarded from the tanks. These special
procedures are given in the Associated Octel Co Ltd booklet
27/80, Leaded Gasolene Tank Cleaning and Disposal of Sludge.
(c) Emergency treatment:
1
_ Ingestion
Do not cause vomiting because of the risk of aspiration. Get
medical aid immediately.
2
_ Aspiration
If there is a sign of aspiration in to the lungs (for example,
chest pains or short of breath after vomiting) get medical aid
immediately.
3
_ Inhalation
Remove patient from exposure, keep warm and prevent movement.
If unconscious, give oxygen and get medical aid immediately.
If breathing stops or shows signs of failure, give artificial
respiration and if necessary cardiac resuscitation.
4
_ Eyes
Clean the eyes with water for at least ten minutes.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 206
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(5) Group B - Aviation Kerosenes
(a) Health aspects:
1
_ Ingestion
Kerosenes can show moderately acute oral toxicity, but
aspiration before or after ingestion is more dangerous than
ingestion. There can be some irritation of the mouth and
gastrointestinal tract.
2
_ Inhalation
No hygiene standard has been made for kerosenes. This is
because the low volatility of these materials does not cause
dangerous concentrations of gases. Precautions must be obeyed
to prevent exposure to kerosene gases which can collect in
some given locations. The concentrations of the gases in a
working environment must not be more than 5 mg/cubic metre.
3
_ Aspiration
Aspiration of kerosene is very dangerous and can quickly cause
dangerous penumonitis.
4
Kerosenes are primary skin irritants that defat and dry the
skin. Frequent or long exposure can cause dermatitis. Kerosene
in the eyes can be lightly irritant.
(b) Emergency treatment:
1
_ Ingestion
Do not cause vomiting because of the risk of aspiration. Get
medical aid immediately.
2
_ Aspiration
immediately.
3
_ Eyes
Clean the eyes with water for at least ten minutes.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 207
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) Group C - Aviation Oils (Mineral Oil-based Lubrication Oils)
(a) Health aspects:
1
_ Ingestion
Up to date highly refined petroleum-derived lubrication oils
only give light acute oral toxicity. The additives included in
to some of these formulated materials do not always effect the
toxicity.
2
_ Inhalation
The low volatility of these materials does not cause dangerous
concentrations of gases, unless with open systems at high
temperatures. Precautions must be obeyed to prevent exposure
to oil gases which can collect in some given locations. The
concentrations of the gases in a working environment must not
be more than 5 mq/cubic metre.
3
_ Aspiration
The viscosity of petroleum-derived lubrication oils will show
how dangerous they are for aspiration. This will give the
possible entry in to respiratory system and the level of
subsequent penetration. No aviation oil has a sufficiently low
viscosity at usual day temperatures to show a danger for
aspiration.
4
Frequent or long exposure can cause dermatitis. Some of these
materials in the eyes can be lightly irritant.
1
_ Ingestion
No special treatment is necessary. Do not cause vomiting
because of the risk of aspiration.
2
_ Aspiration
immediately.
3
_ Eyes
Clean the eyes with large quantities of water.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 208
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(7) Group C - Aviation Oils (Synthetic-based, Non-petroleum Lubrication
Oils)
(a) Health aspects:
1
_ Ingestion
These materials only give light acute oral toxicity.
2
_ Inhalation
These materials have very low gas pressures and dangerous
concentrations of gases are not made in usual work
environments.
3
These materials do not irritate the skin. But frequent or long
exposure to the skin can give light irritation and this can
increase with constant exposure to the skin.
Good personal and industrial hygiene will keep these effects
to a minimum. These materials can be lightly irritating in the
eyes.
1
_ Ingestion
If more than about a mouthful is drunk, get medical aid
immediately. Do not cause vomiting.
2
_ Skin
Remove with soap and water. Remove cloths which have oil on
them. Clean or dry-clean contaminated cloths before they are
used again.
3
_ Eyes
(8) Group D - Methanol Mixtures
(a) Health aspects:
1
_ Ingestion
Methanol mixtures show light acute oral toxicity and the
effects of ingestion change very much between each person. In
some people, systemic effects occur in less than an hour of
ingestion of a toxic quantity. These effects can be nausea and
stomach pains followed by vomiting. In other people, the
effects do not occur for up to 24 hours. If the effects are
very bad, visual interference and different other bad

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 209
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

neurological effects can occur. Bad effects such as permanent
blindness or death from respiratory, cardiac or kidney failure
can occur.
2
_ Inhalation
With correct conditions dangerous concentrations of gases will
not occur. In bad conditions of high temperatures and bad air
(such as in a closed hanger in the tropics), leakage or open
containers and tanks which hold these materials, can give
toxic concentrations. The effects are dizziness, headaches and
irritation of the respiratory tract.
Exposure for eight hours to 800 to 1000 ppm causes dangerous
and permanent decrease of vision. The rate of excretion of
methanol from the body is slow, so its effects build up at
high exposure levels. The concentration in the working
environment must not exceed 200 ppm.
3
_ Skin contact
Methanol mixtures cause the skin to dry and frequent or long
exposure can cause dermititis.
4
_ Eye contact
Methanol mixtures can cause light but transient irritation if
it gets in to the eyes.
The dangerous permanent damage of vision is a systemic effect
which results from methanol that has soaked in to the
bloodstream. It is not caused by the methanol which has
touched the eye.
1
_ Ingestion
If more than about a mouthful is drunk, get medical aid
immediately. Do not cause vomiting. Keep the patient laying
prone, warm and prevent movement. If there is respiratory
distress or respiration stops, give artificial respiration.
2
_ Inhalation
Remove the patient from exposure, keep warm and prevent
movement. If systemic symptoms occur, refer to ingestion.
3
_ Skin contact
Remove with soap and water. Clothes wet with methanol mixtures
must be removed and then fully dry before you use again.
4
_ Eye contact

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 210
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Subtask 70-11-11-869-052
B. General
This safety precaution which is specified for CPS is to be used as an aid
to the operator who works with these solutions.
This safety precaution is not to be used by a person for new bath make-up
or for additions to the solutions. These persons must get special
instructions from the local safety officer when they work with the
different poisonous substances.
The medical doctor, safety engineer or the applicable person must give
the necessary safety precautions and the first aid facilities, related
with the use of chemicals in engine overhaul and cleaning.
(1) Procedure
(a) Alkaline solution (not caustic solutions)
1
_ Do not let the solution touch the skin or the eyes. Mild
alkaline solutions such as detergent and
metasilicate/phosphate based cleaning solution can cause
irritation to the skin and eyes.
2
_ If the solution accidently touches the skin, wash the skin
with clean water.
3
_ If the solution accidently touches the eyes, wash the eyes
with clean water and get medical aid immediately.
(b) Caustic Solutions
1
_ Do not let the solution touch the skin or the eyes. Hot and
concentrated caustic solutions cause bad burns to the skin and
eyes.
2
_ Do not breathe the gases, this can cause burns to the
breathing passages.
3
_ Immediate medical aid is necessary if the solution touches the
skin or eyes.
(c) Cyanide Solutions
1
_ Sodium or potassium cyanide solutions are very dangerous.
2
_ Do not let the solutions touch the skin or the eyes. Poisoning
can occur if the solutions are soaked in to the skin.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 211
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3
_ Do not breathe the gases.
4
_ Hydrogen cyanide gas can be made if the solution is mixed with
an acid. This gas is highly dangerous.
5
_ Solutions are stronger in alkaline and usually contain added
caustic soda (refer to caustic solutions).
6
_ The instructions given by the safety officer must be obeyed.
Immediate medical aid is most important if the solution
touches the skin or if poisoning occurs.
(d) Permanganate Solutions
1
_ Do not let the solution touch the skin or the eyes.
2
3
_ Permanganate solutions are strong oxidising agents and cause
burns to the skin and eyes. Suffocation can occur from
breathing the gases.
4
_ Strong alkaline solutions when they are hot can cause bad
burns and etching to the skin (refer to caustic solutions).
5
_ Immediate medical aid is most important if the solution
touches the skin.
(e) Chromate Solutions (alkaline)
1
2
3
_ Alkaline caustic chromate solutions when they are hot can
cause an oxidising effect on the skin and eyes. It can also
cause burns to the skin and eyes (refer to caustic solutions).
4
_ Chromatic solutions are dangerous.
5
touches the skin or eyes and if poisoning occurs.
(f) Caustic Molten Salt
1

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 212
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2
_ Use full protective clothing, full face mask and asbestos
gloves when you work with the molten salt bath.
3
_ Do not let the water or wet parts get into the salt bath. The
bath temperature (approximately 500 deg.C (932 deg.F)) can
cause explosive gases of water and spatter of contents.
4
_ Heat and caustic burns can occur if the salts touch the skin
(refer to caustic solutions). Immediate medical aid is most
important.
(g) Hydrochloric Acid Solution
1
2
3
_ Hydrochloric acid solutions when they are hot can cause bad
burns and stings to the skin.
4
_ The gases cause painful burning to the breathing passages and
to the eyes.
5
touches the body or is breathed in.
(h) Phosphoric Acid Solutions
1
_ Precautions are the same as for hydrochloric acid solution.
(i) Sulfuric Acid Solutions
1
_ Precautions are the same as for hydrochloric acid solution.
(j) Sulfuric Acid (concentrated)
1
2
_ Do not breathe the gases
3
_ Water must not be added to concentrated sulfuric acid. This
causes the concentrated acid to heat up which will result in
boiling and spattering of the solution. For dilute acid the
concentrated acid must be added slowly, while you stir and
cool to an unwanted quantity of water.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 213
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4
_ Concentrated sulfuric acid when hot can cause oxidation,
etching and dehydration of the skin. The hot acid gives off
gases which cause etching of the breathing passages and eyes.
5
touches parts of the body.
(k) Nitric Acid Solution
1
2
3
_ Nitric acid solution causes bad etching of the skin and eyes.
Solution of a higher concentration when hot has a strong
oxidising effect on the skin.
4
_ If the solution starts to oxidize, brown gases are given off.
These gases are poisonous and must not be breathed in.
5
(l) Hydrofluoric Acid Solution
1
2
3
_ Diluted hydrofluoric acid solutions are strong acids which
will cause a paintful burn on the skin and eyes. Hydrofluoric
acid is frequently used in mixtures with other acids such as
nitric. This will give better etching effect.
4
_ Concentrated solutions give off HF gases which are dangerous
and cause a very bad burn to the eyes and breathing passages.
Use full protective clothing, face shield and breathing
apparatus when you work with hydrofluoric acids.
5
_ HF on hot surfaces can cause an explosive mixture of hydrogen
and air.
6
_ Immediate medical aid is most important if there is a leakage
of the solution, poisoning or if the solution touches the
skin. The medical people must wear breathing apparatus.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 214
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(m) Chromic Acid Solutions
1
2
3
_ Chromic acid solutions when hot cause very strong burns and
oxidising properties on the skin and on organic materials such
as cloths or plastics.
4
_ Chromic acid solutions are very dangerous.
5
(n) Nitroaromatic Solution (contraining cyanide)
1
_ This solution is used for the removal of metal platings and
spray coatings.
2
3
4
_ Obey safety precautions as for cyanide solutions.
5
_ The nitroaromatics contained in this solution have oxidising
properties. This can cause bad burns of the skin and on other
materials such as paper, clothing and plastic.
6
touches the skin or eyes.
(o) Phenolic Solutions (organic)
1
_ Do not let the solution touch the skin or the eyes. Phenols
can soak through the skin and cause poisoning.
2
_ Do not breathe the gases. Breathing apparatus must be used.
3
_ The liquid solutions and gases which contain phenols are very
dangerous. They cause a burn of the skin, eyes and breathing
passages.
4
touches the skin or eyes.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 215
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(p) Trichloroethylene/Perchloroethylene
1
2
3
_ Do not smoke near a trichloroethylene/perchloroethylene area.
Trichloroethylene/perchloroethylene do not cause a fire risk.
The heat from a cigarette or fire is sufficient to divide
these materials in to the make up of hydrogen chloride gas
(burn of the lungs) and the very poisonous phosgene (COCI2 -
mustard gas).
4
_ Immediate medical aid is most important if poisoning ocurrs.
(q) Organic Acid Solutions
1
_ Safety precautions as for hydrochloric acid.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-11

Page 216
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

SPECIAL HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND SOLUTIONS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
___________________________________________________________________
TASK 70-11-12-500-011
Special Handling of Materials
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
Not Applicable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-11-12-869-050
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-11-12-910-050
A. Titanium Components
CAUTION : CADMIUM WHICH STRESSED TITANIUM CAN CAUSE CRACK DEFECTS IN THE
_______
TITANIUM AT A TEMPERATURE WHICH IS BELOW THE MELT POINT OF
CADMIUM, 609 DEG F (321 DEG C).
CAUTION : USE A LOT OF CARE WITH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT THAT IS IN THE AREA
_______
OF TITANIUM COMPONENTS. AN ELECTRICAL SOURCE THAT TOUCHES A
TITANIUM COMPONENT AND TRANSMIS A CURRENT CAN CAUSE AN ARC
BURN. ARC BURNS CAN RESULT IN FAILURE OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
AND CAUSE CRACKS.
(1) Titanium components can have bad effects when it touches cadmium,
bismuth, lead, tin, zinc, gold or silver. Tools and fixtures made
from of which have a layer of these metals must not be used when
titanium components are made. If they are to be used immediate
removal of unwanted metals is to be applied.
(2) Carefully prevent contamination by perspiration or by salts. The use

of gloves is not necessary.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-12

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) After the component is cleaned and before heat treatment of a
temperature more than 450 deg.F (232.22 deg.C) clean gloves must be
used for the protection of components during their movement.
(4) Particles of cadmium plate can be removed by the specified repair

instruction.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-12

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CHEMICAL CLEANING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_________________________________________
TASK 70-11-50-100-010
Remove Grease from the External Surfaces of the Engine
CAUTION : IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OPERATOR TO OBTAIN AND OBSERVE THE

_______
MANUFACTURERS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
INFORMATION.
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
NOTE : There are two types of alkali cleaner which can be used in this
____
procedure. With one type you must mix the cleaner with water before
you use it. With the other type you can use it as supplied.
2. ______________________
A. Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No specific warning notice
B. Consumable Materials
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Material No. V01-300 *

alkali cleaner (Ref. 70-30-00)
R
alkaline gel cleaner (Ref. 70-30-00)
alkaline gel cleaner (Ref. 70-30-00)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 201
Feb 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

C. Referenced Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
71-13-00-010-010 Opening of the Fan Cowls 437AL(447AL),438AR(448AR)

71-13-00-410-010 Closing of the Fan Cowls 437AL(447AL),438AR(448AR)
78-30-00-040-012 Deactivation of the Thrust Reverser Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) 4101KS
78-30-00-440-012 Activation of the Thrust Reverser Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) 4101KS
78-32-00-010-010 Opening of the Thrust Reverser Halves
78-32-00-410-010 Closing of the Thrust Reverser Halves
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-11-50-941-050
A. Safety Precautions
(1) On the center pedestal, on the ENG panel 115VU:
(a) Put a warning notice to tell persons not to start the engine.
(2) Make sure that the engine 1(2) shutdown occurred not less than 5
minutes before you do this procedure.
(3) On the overhead maintenance panel 50VU:
(a) Make sure that the ON legend of the ENG/FADEC GND PWR/1(2)
pushbutton switch is off.
(b) Put a warning notice to tell persons not to energize the FADEC
1(2).
Subtask 70-11-50-010-051
B. Open the fan cowls (Ref. TASK 71-13-00-010-010):

FOR 1000EM1
437AL, 438AR.
FOR 1000EM2
447AL, 448AR.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Subtask 70-11-50-040-050
C. Deactivate the thrust reverser.
WARNING : THE THRUST REVERSER HYDRAULIC

_______ CONTROL UNIT (HCU) MUST BE
DEACTIVATED BEFORE WORKING ON OR AROUND THE THRUST REVERSER.
FAILURE TO DEACTIVATE THE HCU CAN RESULT IN INADVERTENT THRUST
REVERSER OPERATION AND INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
(1) Deactivate the thrust reverser hydraulic control unit (HCU)

(Ref. TASK 78-30-00-040-012).
Subtask 70-11-50-010-050
D. Open the thrust reverser halves (Ref. TASK 78-32-00-010-010):

FOR 1000EM1
451AL, 452AR.
FOR 1000EM2
461AL, 462AR.
Subtask 70-11-50-110-050
E. Prepare the alkali cleaner
(1) If alkali cleaner (Material No. V01-300), alkali cleaner (Material

No. V01-339) or alkali cleaner (Material No. V01-340) is used, it
must be mixed with water in the proportion of 25 percent by volume
before use.
R
R (2) If alkali cleaner (Material No. V01-422) is used, it must be mixed

with water in the proportion of 18 percent by volume before use.
R (3) Mix the cleaner with water
(a) Fill the container to 50 percent of its operating volume with

clean cold water.
(b) Slowly and carefully add the applicable quantity of alkali

cleaner.
(c) Stir to mix.
(d) Fill the remaining operating volume of the container with clean
cold water.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 203
Feb 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

(e) Stir to mix.
R (4) If alkaline gel cleaner (Material No. V01-434) or alkaline gel

cleaner (Material No. V01-435) is used, it can be used as supplied.
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-11-50-620-050
A. Install covers on all the openings in to the engine
(1) The openings include:
(a) The inlet.
(b) The exhaust.
(c) All bleeds.
(d) Open fuel and oil lines.
(e) Breather tubes.
(f) Open electrical connectors.
Subtask 70-11-50-110-051
B. Remove grease from the engine external surfaces
R (1) If alkali cleaner (Material No. V01-300), alkali cleaner (Material

R No. V01-339), alkali cleaner (Material No. V01-340) or alkali cleaner
R (Material No. V01-422) is used, apply it to the external surfaces of
R the engine by spray, steam or foam.
(2) If alkaline gel cleaner (Material No. V01-434) or alkaline gel

cleaner (Material No. V01-435) is used, apply it to the external
surfaces of the engine by spray.
(3) Let the cleaner stay on the engine for between 10 and 20 minutes.
CAUTION : REMOVE THE ALKALI CLEANER COMPLETELY. IF NOT COMPLETELY

_______
REMOVED, DAMAGE CAN OCCUR TO THE INLET AND THRUST REVERSER
ACOUSTIC SURFACES.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 204
Feb 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

(4) Flush the engine fully with warm or hot water.
CAUTION : INSURE THE DEBRIS IS CLEAR FROM THE NACELLE DRAIN HOLES.
_______
Subtask 70-11-50-630-050
C. Remove all of the covers from the openings on the engine.
5. Close-up
________
Subtask 70-11-50-410-050
A. Close Access
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tool(s) and other
items.
(2) Close the thrust reverser halves (Ref. TASK 78-32-00-410-010):

FOR 1000EM1
451AL, 452AR.
FOR 1000EM2
461AL, 462AR.
Subtask 70-11-50-440-050
B. Activate the thrust reverser HCU (Ref. TASK 78-30-00-440-012).
Subtask 70-11-50-410-051
C. Close Access
(1) Close the fan cowls (Ref. TASK 71-13-00-410-010):

FOR 1000EM1
437AL, 438AR.
FOR 1000EM2
447AL, 448AR.
(2) Remove the warning notice(s).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

R TASK 70-11-50-100-020
R Cleaning of Contact Points and Wiring Harnesses
R CAUTION : IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OPERATOR TO OBTAIN AND OBSERVE THE

_______
R MANUFACTURERS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
R INFORMATION.
R 1. __________________
Reason for the Job
R Self Explanatory
R 2. ______________________
R A. Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R No specific warning notice
R B. Consumable Materials
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R REFERENCE DESIGNATION
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R Material No. V01-410 *

R Isoproptyl alcohol (Ref. 70-30-00)
R Material No. V02-099 *
R lint free cloth (Ref. 70-30-00)
R C. Referenced Information
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R REFERENCE DESIGNATION
R -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R 71-13-00-010-010 Opening of the Fan Cowls 437AL(447AL),438AR(448AR)

R 71-13-00-410-010 Closing of the Fan Cowls 437AL(447AL),438AR(448AR)
R 78-30-00-040-012 Deactivation of the Thrust Reverser Hydraulic Control
R Unit (HCU) 4101KS
R 78-30-00-440-012 Activation of the Thrust Reverser Hydraulic Control
R Unit (HCU) 4101KS
R 78-32-00-010-010 Opening of the Thrust Reverser Halves
R 78-32-00-410-010 Closing of the Thrust Reverser Halves

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 206
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

R 3. __________
Job Set-up
R Subtask 70-11-50-941-051
R A. Safety Precautions
R (1) On the center pedestal, on the ENG panel 115VU:
R (a) Put a warning notice to tell persons not to start the engine.
R (2) Make sure that the engine 1(2) shutdown occurred not less than 5
R minutes before you do this procedure.
R (3) On the overhead maintenance panel 50VU:
R (a) Make sure that the ON legend of the ENG/FADEC GND PWR/1(2)
R pushbutton switch is off.
R (b) Put a warning notice to tell persons not to energize the FADEC
R 1(2).
R Subtask 70-11-50-010-052
R B. Open the fan cowls (Ref. TASK 71-13-00-010-010):

R FOR 1000EM1
R 437AL, 438AR.
R FOR 1000EM2
R 447AL, 448AR.
R Subtask 70-11-50-040-051
R C. Deactivate the Thrust Reverser.
R WARNING : THE THRUST REVERSER HYDRAULIC

_______ CONTROL UNIT (HCU) MUST BE
R DEACTIVATED BEFORE WORKING ON OR AROUND THE THRUST REVERSER.
R FAILURE TO DEACTIVATE THE HCU CAN RESULT IN INADVERTENT THRUST
R REVERSER OPERATION AND INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO
R EQUIPMENT.
R (1) Deactivate the thrust reverser hydraulic control unit (HCU)

R (Ref. TASK 78-30-00-040-012).

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 207
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

R Subtask 70-11-50-010-053
R D. Open the thrust reverser halves (Ref. TASK 78-32-00-010-010):

R FOR 1000EM1
R 451AL, 452AR.
R FOR 1000EM2
R 461AL, 462AR.
R 4. Procedure
_________
R Subtask 70-11-50-620-051
R A. Install Covers on all the Openings in to the Engine
R (1) The openings include:
R (a) The inlet.
R (b) The exhaust.
R (c) All bleeds.
R (d) Open fuel and oil lines.
R (e) Breather tubes.
R (f) Open electrical connectors.
R Subtask 70-11-50-110-052
R B. Clean Contact Points and Wiring Harnesses
R (1) Spray Isoproptyl alcohol (Material No. V01-410) on contact points and
R wiring harnesses.
R (2) Wipe off the area with lint free cloth (Material No. V02-099).
R (3) Blow dry with clean dry air at 30 psi(206.8 kPa) pressure.
R Subtask 70-11-50-630-051
R C. Remove all of the covers from the openings on the engine.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 208
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

R 5. Close-up
________
R Subtask 70-11-50-410-052
R A. Close Access
R (1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tool(s) and other
R items.
R (2) Close the thrust reverser halves (Ref. TASK 78-32-00-410-010):

R FOR 1000EM1
R 451AL, 452AR.
R FOR 1000EM2
R 461AL, 462AR.
R Subtask 70-11-50-440-051
R B. Activate the thrust reverser HCU (Ref. TASK 78-30-00-440-012).
R Subtask 70-11-50-410-053
R C. Close Access
R (1) Close the fan cowls (Ref. TASK 71-13-00-410-010):

R FOR 1000EM1
R 437AL, 438AR.
R FOR 1000EM2
R 447AL, 448AR.
R (2) Remove the warning notice(s).

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-50

Page 209
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

CHEMICAL CLEANING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_________________________________________
TASK 70-11-56-910-001
Cleaning Requirements After Chemical Contact with Fire Extinguinshing Agents,

Hydraulic Fluid, Oil, or Fuel
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
A. Referenced Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R 70-11-50-100-010 Remove Grease from the External Surfaces of the

R Engine
R 70-11-50-100-020 Cleaning of Contact Points and Wiring Harnesses
R 72-31-11-100-010 Cleaning of the LP Compressor Blades
70-11-56-991-150 Fig. 201
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-11-56-869-050
CAUTION : IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OPERATOR TO GET AND OBEY THE

_______
MANUFACTURERS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE
MATERIALS INFORMATION SUCH AS, HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS,
PHYSICAL/CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS, FIRE, EXPLOSION, REACTIVITY,
HEALTH HAZARD DATA, PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING, USE AND
CONTROL PROCEDURES AND TO OBEY LOCAL REGULATIONS.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-56

Page 201
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-11-56-991-150)
Subtask 70-11-56-910-050
A. General
NOTE : This procedure provides operators with information in determining

____
appropriate cleaning and disassembly requirements for engines that
have come into contact with fire extinguishing agents, hydraulic
fluid, oils, or fuel. Where the fire has been contained to the
burner or gaspath areas, the operator must determine if
over-temperature limits have been exceeded.
NOTE : Any operators who know of fire extinguishing agents that are not
____
specified in Fig. 70-11-56-991-150 but are used at airports, in
test cells and in hangers, should provide their local IAE
representive technical data and Material Safety Data Sheets for
forwarding to IAE Customer Support.
(1) The major concern with the introduction of dry powder chemicals into
the engine is corrosion during subsequent engine operation. These
materials can be extremely harmful to hot section parts, as exposure
to the engine operating environment causes chemical reactions.
R (2) Tests show results that follow
R (a) Stainless steel alloys, nickel base alloys (coated or uncoated)

R and cobalt base alloys, show a high degree of susceptibility to
R chemical corrosion, even at temperatures considerably below the
R engine operating range.
R (b) Titanium, aluminum, magnesium, cadmium plated and nickel-cadmium

R plated low alloys steels no signs of corrosion from bicarbonate
R compounds (dry powder) at engine operating temperatures.
R (c) Titanium in the compressor can experience stress corrosion from

R foam chemical at service operation temperatures. However,
R overspray on the fan blades can be removed by hand wipe cleaning
R (Ref. TASK 72-31-11-100-010).

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-56

Page 202
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

R Cleaning Requirements after Chemical Contacts

Figure 201/TASK 70-11-56-991-150

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-56

Page 203
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Regarding the use of Halon 1301 fire extinguishing agents, products
of decomposition will include certain acids which can have a slight
corrosive effect on gaspath materials when exposed to high
temperature. Turbine airfoil coatings can degrade from Halon 1301
contact at 1800 deg.F (982 deg.C) for a short exposure if discharged
directly into the core of the engine from a ground unit.
R However, onboard nacelle fire extinguisher systems (Halon 1301) on
R turbofan engines, do not discharge directly into the core but rather
R into the nacelle compartment which would not result in contact with
the turbine airfoils.
R (4) The oil system should be analyzed for contamination because agents
R could enter the oil system for those engine models which use
R labyrinth seals.
R Subtask 70-11-56-910-051
R B. Examine the Engine
R (1) Do an external visual inspection to find parts which have signs of

R contamination from the chemical fire extinguisher agent.
R (2) Do an internal borescope inspection to find parts which have signs of

R contamination from the chemical fire extinguisher agent.
R NOTE : An internal or external engine wash is not necessary after

____
R contact with Halon 1301 (CFC), typically used in nacelle fire
R extinguisher system.
R (3) As soon as possible after the use of a dry chemical fire

R extinguishing agent, make sure that the rotors turn freely and there
R is no unusual noise.
R (4) Internal/External wash
R (a) Remove, disassemble and clean the parts as soon as possible to

R minimize possible corrosion of engine parts by the agents and
R contaminations.
R (Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-11-56-991-150)
R NOTE : It is not possible to remove all remaining foam agent and

____
R chemical residue from the engine by a water or detergent
R wash.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-56

Page 204
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

R (b) When the engine gas path is exposed to foam chemical agents,
R remove the engine, disassemble and clean the engine parts as soon
R as possible. Do not compressor wash the engine before disassembly
R and cleaning of the affected parts.
R (c) Dry chemical powder fire extinguisher agent.
R CAUTION : DO NOT COMPRESSOR WASH THE ENGINE AFTER EXPOSURE TO DRY

_______
R CHEMICAL POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHER AGENTS. THESE AGENTS
R ARE NOT WATER SOLUBLE. A WATER WASH ON DRY CHEMICAL
R POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHER AGENTS CAUSE CAKING, STICKING
R OF THESE MATERIALS ON THE ENGINE PARTS AND CLOGGING OF
R AIR HOLES AND CAVITIES.
R 1
_ When dry chemical powder fire extinguisher agent get into the
R engine gas path, these materials at service operation
R temperatures can cause dangerous corrosion damage to the
R compressor, the hot section and the turbine area parts.
R 2
_ Dry chemical powder fire extinguisher agent can cause
R contamination to the engine oil system.
R 3
_ Do not start the engine.
R 4
_ Remove the engine from service and disassemble to remove and
R clean immediately all contamination of the parts.
R 5
_ Do a visual and boroscope inspection to find the quantity of
R contamination and/or mechanical damage or fire damage of the
R parts.
R (d) If you find signs of chemical contact on the external of the

R engine, clean the external parts (Ref. TASK 70-11-50-100-010).
R (e) If you find a part which was in contact with the dry chemicals
R listed in
R (Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-11-56-991-150)
R do (Ref. TASK 70-11-50-100-010).
R
R NOTE : If you do step (e) do not compressor wash.

____
R (f) Clean parts after chemical contacts with hydraulic fluid, oil or
R fuel.
R 1
_ Do (Ref. TASK 70-11-50-100-010) and (Ref. TASK 70-11-50-100-
R 020).

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-11-56

Page 205
May 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

PENETRANT INSPECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
____________________________________________
TASK 70-23-05-230-010
Local Application of Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
A. Consumable Materials
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

acetone (Ref. 70-30-00)
isopropyl alcohol (Ref. 70-30-00)
non aqueous developer (Ref. 70-30-00)
dry developer (Ref. 70-30-00)
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-05-869-050
A. General

_______
(1) Penetrants and removers must be from the same manufacturers.

Developers need not be from the same manufacturers.
(2) AMS 2647 is to be included in these procedures.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-05

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-05-110-050
A. Clean the area to be inspected.
(1) Clean the area to be inspected as specified in the engine manual with
clean paper tissues or a clean lint-free cloth soaked in acetone
(Material No. V01-031) or isopropyl alcohol (Material No. V01-124).
NOTE : The engine manual could give the clean procedure before a
____
local penetrant inspection is done. If this is so, step (1)
can be ignored.
(2) If necessary, dry the area with a clean cloth or tissue.
Subtask 70-23-05-230-050
B. Local Application of Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
(1) Apply the penetrant
(a) Parts must be dry and at room temperature before you apply the
penetrant, maximum temperature is 120 deg.F (49 deg.C), to
prevent damage to the penetrant liquid.
(b) Apply the penetrant by brush or spray to the area specified in

the engine manual. The contact time must not be less than 10
minutes and not more than 60 minutes.
(2) Remove unwanted penetrant.
(a) Remove the unwanted penetrant with a cotton bud, lint-free cloth
or paper tissue, made moist with acetone (Material No. V01-031)
or isopropyl alcohol (Material No. V01-124).
NOTE : The area must be cleaned to remove the surface penetrant

____
only. Do not flood the surface with solvent. This step
must be done in ultra-violet light.
(b) Dry the area with a dry lint-free cloth or dry compressed air at
a maximum pressure of 25 psi (1,73 bar).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-05

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Apply the developer and inspect the part.
(a) Apply dry developer (Material No. V06-032) or non aqueous

developer (Material No. V06-030) by a blow dispenser or by
dusting and permit a minimum touch time of 10 minutes.
(b) Remove the powder that is not necessary, with clean dry
compressed air at a maximum pressure of 5 psi (0.35 bar).
(c) Visually inspect the area after 10 minutes of development time

under ultra-violet light. If crack indications are present, use a
10X magnification to find the type of crack indications.
NOTE : Parts must be inspected with 2 hours. Part must be cleaned

____
and done again if time after developing is more than 2
hours.
(d) Do again a check for crack indications, at 10x to 30X

magnification under white light. Some defects seen by penetrant
inspection cannot be seen under white light; if this occurs, get
metallurgical assistance.
(e) Remove the remaining developer powder with a clean dry air blast.
Carefully examine areas such as oilways and airways.
(f) Apply corrosion protection if required.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-05

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TORQUE TIGHTENING TECHNIQUE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
___________________________________________________
TASK 70-23-11-911-013
General Torque Tightening Techniques
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-23-11-911-012 The Procedure to Use Torque Wrenches and Power Tools
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-11-869-052
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-11-911-052
A. General
(1) The torque values specified in the maintenance manual must always be
used.
(2) The use of a lubricant is very important to get the correct bolt
tension. This is because most of the torque becomes friction at the
nut and bolt bearing surfaces and the screw threads.
(3) Unless specified differently, the given torque values only apply when
the screw threads and bearing surfaces are correctly lubricated with
clean engine oil of an approved specification.
(4) Where no special torque values are given the standard torque values
must be used.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(5) The torque values used for J-threads are the same as those used for
standard screw threads.
(6) The torque values must be specified as follows:
(7) Torque values in lbfin (mdaN).
(8) Angles of turn in deg.
(9) Extension values in inches (mm).
(10) When a part to be torque tightened is hot, sufficient time must be

given for it to cool (i.e. to a temperature equal to that of its
adjacent parts) before it is fully torque tightened.
(11) The joints between flanges, or between mating surfaces, must be very
carefully made during the assembly. Also, when snap-fit joints are
made, the mating surfaces must be correctly engaged before the full
torque value is applied. Unless a special procedure is given in the
assembly instructions, some of the bolts will be installed at equal
distances. They will then be equally tightened, until the mating
surfaces are fully engaged. The bolts can then be tightened to
approximately 75 percent of their full torque value, in a set
sequence (e.g. 180, 90, 45 deg) so that the bolts and flanges do not
become locally stressed. The full torque value can then be applied,
in the same set sequence.
(12) All torque values must be applied slowly and smoothly, to get the
most accurate and constant results. There will be times when the
specified torque values can not be applied. At such times, an
accurate analysis must be made to find the correct torque value to be
applied.
(13) When minimum torque values are given for castellated nuts, they must
be tightened to the specified limits. If necessary, tighten the nut
again to align the lock-slot.
(14) When minimum and maximum torque values are given for castellated
nuts, align the lock-solt but do not tighten the nuts by more than
the maximum limit. If this is not possible, a different nut must be
used.
(15) The nut must be turned rather than the bolt wherever possible.
(16) Instructions for the use of torque wrenches must always be followed
(Ref. TASK 70-23-11-911-012).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(17) Definitions:
(18) Self-locking or prevailing torque:

The torque required to overcome kinetic friction between the fastener
mating threads with the locking element fully engaged and with no
axial load on the assembly.
(19) Breakaway torque:

The torque required to overcome static friction between the fastener
mating threads with the locking element fully engaged and with no
axial load on the assembly.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-23-11-911-012
The Procedure to Use Torque Wrenches and Power Tools
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This task gives instructions on the use of torque wrenches. If the component
to be torque loaded includes self locking fasteners then a check must be
made to make sure that the fastener can be used again (Ref. TASK
70-23-11-911-0130).
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-23-11-991-150 Fig. 201

70-23-11-991-151 Fig. 202
70-23-11-991-152 Fig. 203
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-11-869-051
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-11-911-050
A. Use Torque Wrenches and Power Tools
(1) Hand Torque Wrenches
CAUTION : UNIVERSAL JOINTS MUST NOT BE USED WITH TORQUE WRENCHES

_______
BECAUSE INCORRECT TORQUE VALUES CAN BE SHOWN.
HANDLE EXTENSION MUST NOT BE USED ON TORQUE WRENCHES.
(a) Flexible beam type
1
_ To get the correct torque indication, the handle must be held
lightly with one hand. The wrench must be pulled at right
angles (90 degrees) to the center line of the wrench. The
handle must be free to move on the pivot-point. This will make

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

sure that the concentration of the force or load is at the
correct position
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-23-11-991-150)
The position of the hand must not be changed to a position
that will change the concentration of the force from the
pivot-point to a different position on the handle.
2
_ Do a test on wrenches on a setting rig at regular times to
make sure they give an accurate torque indication.
Interchangeable sockets, adapters and extension bars are
supplied with all wrenches.
3
_ Use a torque wrench which will show the necessary torque value
in the higher range of the scale; this will make sure of an
accurate torque indication. The first and last quarter of the
scale must not be used for mandatory loads. This is because
the torque value shown for small loads cannot be read
accurately in the first and last quarter. Some flexible beam
type wrenches do not show the first and last quarter of the
scale. Wrenches must be set to zero before they are used.
(b) Screwdriver type
1
_ Hold the tool the same as a screwdriver handle: this will make
sure of an accurate torque indication. The handle must be
turned smoothly until the necessary torque value is shown
(Ref. Fig. 202/TASK 70-23-11-991-151)
2
_ Do a test on screwdriver type wrenches to make sure they give
an accurate torque indication. When the screwdriver type
wrenches are not used they must read zero on the scale. If
necessary, adjust the wrenches as specified in the applicable
instruction book.
(2) Power Wrenches
(a) Power wrenches must only be used to initially tighten nuts and
bolts. The power wrenches must be set to give 50 percent of the
correct torque value. An approved hand torque wrench must be used
to tighten nuts and bolts to the correct torque value.
(3) Torque Multiplier
(a) The torque multiplier is a mechanical gearbox or hydraulic unit

and must be used with a torque wrench. Higher torque values are
possible with a torque multiplier than are possible with the
usual range of torque wrenches. The torque wrench must have the

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Flexible Beam Torque Wrench

Figure 201/TASK 70-23-11-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 206
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Screwdriver Torque Wrench

Figure 202/TASK 70-23-11-991-151

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 207
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

correct scale for the ratio of the unit that is used. The torque
multiplier must be calibrated at regular times and kept
serviceable as specified in the applicable instructions.
(4) Torque Wrenches and Extensions
NOTE : The length of extensions, adapters and wrenches must be shown

____
on the tools, or measured correctly before they are used.
(a) When an extension is used with a torque wrench it will change the
length that has an effect on the load. The corrected torque value
that is necessary to give a specified torque value for a part
must be calculated when extensions are used
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-23-11-991-152)
The procedure to calculate the corrected torque value that is
necessary on the torque wrench is given as follows:
T = Specified torque for a part
E = Length of extension or adapter
L = Length of torque wrench
A = Distance through which force is given to a part
R = Corrected torque value
L x T L x T
R = ----- = -----
A L + E
(b) Example
A specified torque of 1440 pound-inches (163 Nm) is necessary on
a part. An extension of 3 inches (76 mm) from center to center of
its holes is used. The torque wrench used has a length of 15
inches (381 mm) from center of handle or handle swivel pin to
center of its square adapter. The extension or adapter and torque
wrench are used in a straight line.
Then:
L x T 15 x 1440
R = ----- = --------- = 1200
L + E 15 + 3
To get the specified torque (T) of 1440 pound-inches (163 Nm) the
corrected torque value (R) that is necessary is 1200 pound-inches
(136 Nm).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 208
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Calculate Corrected Torque Value

Figure 203/TASK 70-23-11-991-152

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 209
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-23-11-911-011
Check for Re-use of Self-Locking Fasteners
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This task gives the procedure to make sure the self-locking nuts, the bolts
and the helical coil inserts (used in the engine) can be used again.
Make a test on them to make sure they will keep a specified torque capacity.
You must discard them if the lock function is not satisfactory; do not try
to repair them.
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

engine oil (Ref. 70-30-00)
B. Referenced Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-23-11-991-153 Fig. 204
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-11-869-050
A. Not Applicable

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 210
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
(Ref. Fig. 204/TASK 70-23-11-991-153)
Subtask 70-23-11-911-051
A. Check for Re-use of Self-Locking Fasteners
(1) Torque Limit
(a) You must make sure the self-locking nuts, the bolts and the
helical coil inserts agree with the necessary torque values
1
_ Minimum breakaway torque
- This is the minimum torque necessary to initialy turn an
installed nut on a bolt or a bolt in a self-locking nut or
helical coil insert. The minimum breakaway torque must not
be less than the value given
2
_ Maximum locking torque
- This is the torque necessary to continuously turn a loosened
nut on a bolt or a bolt in a self-locking nut or helical
coil insert. The maximum locking torque must not be more
than the given value
(2) Monitor the Test Procedure for the Self-Locking Nuts
(a) When you do the test on the nuts made of stainless steel,
corrosion and heat resistant steel, nickel alloy and AMS6304; you
must use the bolts with the dimensions as follows.
1
_ Use the bolts with the major, minor and pitch diameters 0.0003
in. (0.008 mm) less than the given dimensions
2
_ Do this for the bolt sizes of 0.190-32UNF-3A, 0.190-24UNC-3A
and larger.
NOTE : The torque quantity given is measured at room

____
temperature with the threads lubricated with engine oil
(Material No. V10-077).
(3) Monitor the Test Procedure for the Unplated Nuts
(a) When you do the test on the nuts made of unplated stainless
steel, corrosion resistant steel, nickel alloy and AMS6304 steel
(with the threads overcut for plating at assembly) do as follows.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 211
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Torque Check for Re-use of Self-locking nuts - Bolt and Helical Coil Inserts
Figure 204/TASK 70-23-11-991-153- 12 (SHEET 1)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 212
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Torque Check for Re-use of Self-locking nuts - Bolt and Helical Coil Inserts

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 213
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

1
_ The nut threads must have a thickness of silver plate between
0.0003 in. (0.008 mm) and 0.0006 in. (0.015 mm)
2
_ Make sure the nuts are used with unplated bolts of the correct
size and that the necessary values are used
(4) Monitor the Test Procedure for the Unplated Nuts which are not
Disassembled
(a) Monitor the procedure that you use when you do a test on these
unplated nuts. These nuts are always attached to the relevant
assembly (for example brackets or an equivalent component) as
follows.
1
_ Stainless steel, corrosion resistant steel, nickel alloy and
AMS6304 steel nuts.
2
_ The nuts are not subsequently plated at assembly.
(b) When you do a test on the assembly or component do as follows.
1
_ The bolts you use to test the component must be silver plated
to a thickness between 0.0003 in. (0.008 mm) and 0.0006 in.
(0.015 mm)
2
_ When you use plated bolts 0.190 in. (4.83 mm) diameter or
larger you must reduce the diameter, as follows.
- Reduce the major, minor and thread pitch diameters 0.0003
in. (0.008 mm) from class 3A limits.
3
_ When you use plated bolts smaller than 0.190 in. (4.83 mm) in
diameter make sure they have class 2A tolerances
(5) Monitor the Test Procedure for Unplated Carbon or Alloy Steel Nuts
(a) When you do the test on an unplated carbon or alloy steel nut do
as follows:
1
_ Make sure the nut is cadmium plated to a thickness of between
0.0002 in. (0.005 mm) and 0.0005 in. (0.013 mm)
2
_ Test the nut with a cadmium plated bolt

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 214
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) Monitor the Test Procedure for Unplated Aluminium Nuts
(a) When you do the test on an unplated aluminium nut do as follows.
1
_ Make sure you use a cadmium plated bolt

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-11

Page 215
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

PENETRANT INSPECTION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
____________________________________________
TASK 70-23-12-230-010
Local Application of Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

acetone (Ref. 70-30-00)
isopropyl alcohol (Ref. 70-30-00)
non aqueous developer (Ref. 70-30-00)
dry developer (Ref. 70-30-00)
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-12-869-050
A. General

_______
(1) Penetrants and removers must be from the same manufacturers.

Developers need not be from the same manufacturers

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-12

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-12-230-050
A. Local Applications of Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
(1) Clean the area to be inspected.
(a) Clean the area to be inspected as specified in the engine manual

with clean paper tissues or a clean lint-free cloth soaked in
acetone (Material No. V01-031) or isopropyl alcohol (Material No.
V01-124).
NOTE : The engine manual could give the clean procedure before a
____
local penetrant inspection is done. If this is so, step
(a) can be ignored.
(b) If necessary, dry the area with a clean cloth or tissue.
(2) Apply the penetrant.
(a) Parts must be dry and at room temperature before you apply the
penetrant, maximum temperature is 120 deg.F (49 deg.C), to
prevent damage to the penetrant liquid.
(b) Apply the penetrant by brush or spray to the area specified in

the engine manual. The contact time must not be less than 10
minutes and not more than 60 minutes.
(3) Remove unwanted penetrant.
(a) Remove the unwanted penetrant with a cotton bud, lint-free cloth
or paper tissue, made moist with acetone (Material No. V01-031)
or isopropyl alcohol (Material No. V01-124).
NOTE : The area must be cleaned to remove the surface penetrant

____
only. Do not flood the surface with solvent. This step
must be done in ultra-violet light.
(b) Dry the area with a dry lint-free cloth or dry compressed air at
a maximum pressure of 25 psi (175 KPa).
(4) Apply the developer and inspect the part.
(a) Apply dry developer (Material No. V06-032) or non aqueous

developer (Material No. V06-030) by a blow dispenser or by
dusting and permit a minimum touch time of 10 minutes.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-12

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Remove the powder that is not necessary, with clean dry
compressed air at a maximum pressure of 5 psi (35 KPa).
(c) Visually inspect the area after 10 minutes of development time

under ultra-violet light. If crack indications are present, use a
10X magnification to find the type of crack indications.
NOTE : Parts must be inspected with 2 hours. Part must be cleaned

____
and done again if time after developing is more than 2
hours.
(d) Do again a check for crack indications, at 10X to 30X

magnification under white light. Some defects seen by penetrant
inspection cannot be seen under white light; if this occurs, get
metallurgical assistance.
(e) Remove the remaining developer powder with a clean dry air blast.
Carefully examine areas such as oilways and airways.
(f) Apply corrosion protection if required.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-12

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

INSTALLATION OF PREFORMED PACKINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
__________________________________________________________
TASK 70-23-13-911-010
Procedures for the Installation of Preformed Packings
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

liquid paraffin (Ref. 70-30-00)
engine lubricating oil (Ref. 70-30-00)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-23-13-991-150 Fig. 201
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-13-869-050
A. Not Applicable

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-13-911-050
A. Installation of preformed packings:
(1) Identification of Preformed Packings
(a) Preformed packings are sealed in containers which are marked with
the data that follows:
1
_ The name of the part.
2
_ The quantity.
3
_ The engine manufacturer part number.
4
_ The cure date.
(b) The storage life of a preformed packing is calculated from the

cure date on the container.
(c) The preformed packing material is identified with the color of

the material. Alternatively it can be identified from a color
code marked on the outer diameter.
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-23-13-991-150)
(2) The Lubricants Used for Preformed Packings
(a) Preformed packings are lubricated to make them easier to install.

Use the correct lubricant applicable to the system into which the
preformed packing is installed. Apply the lubricant in small
quantities immediately before the preformed packing is installed.
The specified lubricants are as follows:
1
_ Preformed packings in oil systems engine lubricating oil
(Material No. V10-077)
2
_ Preformed packings in fuel systems liquid paraffin (Material
No. V10-060) or engine lubricating oil (Material No. V10-077).
3
_ Silicone rubber seals in air systems - None
4
_ Fluorocarbon seals in air systems engine lubricating oil
(Material No. V10-077)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

NOTE : To prevent damage to rigid seals made of material code
____
SE/DTA or WAF used in air systems: apply a thin layer
of engine lubricating oil, V10-077, to all the surfaces
of the seal before it is installed.
NOTE : There are no fluocarbon seals in the Electronic Engine

____
Control air systems.
(3) Instructions for the Installation of Preformed Packings
(a) Always use new preformed packings.
(b) Make sure that the storage life and condition of the preformed
packings are satisfactory
(c) Make sure that the grooves and the mating faces are clean, smooth
and not damaged before the preformed packing is installed.
(d) Make sure that the preformed packing is not twisted when it is
installed.
(4) Do not install preformed packings to engine parts which are hot. This
will cause damage to the preformed packing.
(a) Use an approved tool to install the preformed packings on to a

part which has two grooves. This will prevent damage to the
preformed packing.
(b) Always install the parts, that have preformed packings installed,
with a straight push.This will prevent twists and subsequent
damage to the preformed packing.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Preformed Packing Identification Table


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Preformed Packing Identification Table


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-23-13-550-020
Storage of Flexible Rings, Hoses and Rubber Components
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This task gives data for the identification, storage and inspection of
rubber and synthetic rubber components.
2. ______________________
Not Applicable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-13-869-051
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-13-550-050
A. Storage of flexible rings, hoses and rubber components:
(1) Storage Life
(a) The storage life of rubber ans synthetic rubber components is

calculated from the cure date. It is written on the part and/or
on the parts related container. It is applicable to all rubber or
synthetic rubber parts, bonded rubber to metal parts, cables,
harnesses, hoses and hose assemblies. This does not include hoses
on assembled units and accessories. It is only related to parts
that are not installed.
(b) Cure dates are divided into quarters as follows:

1st quarter - January, February and March
2sd quarter - April, May and June
3rd quarter - July, August and September
4th quarter - October, November and December
The quarter number and the year, with the letter Q in between
gives the cure date. A cure date of 2Q91 shows the cure date as
April, May or June of 1991. On some parts, the month in which the
part was made, is shown in parentheses, for example 2Q91 (MAY).
Thus a part with a cure date of 2Q91 will have used one year of
its storage life on the 30th June 1992.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 206
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(2) Cure Dates
(a) Cure dates of rubber or synthetic rubber parts, that are not
installed, are shown as follows:
1
_ Parts sufficiently large to have the cure data written on them
(this does not include seal rings but does include diaphragms
and bulkhead seals) are stamped or stencilled with a permanent
marking fluid. The color must be different to the color of the
material.
2
_ Parts which are too small, also seal rings, have a label
attached to them and then put into a container. The container
must have the cure date, IAE part number, batch number and
makers name or reference number written on them.
3
_ Hoses are identified with two groups of numbers and letters,
continuously writeen on the lenght of the hose. The first
group gives makers data, the second group gives the length, or
batch number and the cure date as follows:
a
_ The first four numbers - length or batch number.
b
_ The subsequent or middle number and letter - quarter symbol
and 0 (cure date).
c
_ The last two numbers - year symbol (cure date).
Example: 01012Q87 - 101st length or batch made in the
second quarter of 1987.
4
_ Hose assemblies also have identification tags as follows:
a
_ Code tag (the same data as on the hose).
b
_ Identification tag (shows hose piece number, test date,
inspectors mark and makers identification).
c
_ Cure date tag (shows cure date of hose).
(3) Storage of Parts
(a) Keep the rubber and synthetic rubber parts in good condition.
Make sure the storage conditions give you the maximum storage
life. Storage of the parts must be in conditions that give
maximum protection against: damage, sunlight, ozone, moist
conditions, large airflows, temperatures that are too hot or too
cold and contamination (from fuels, oils, greases and solvents).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 207
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

If the parts are supplied in containers, they must be kept in
their containers until they are used. Do not keep the parts in
storage for a long time. The rate of use is to be related to the
quantity of the parts, use the part with the least life remaining
first. Do not let the rubber parts touch metals.
(b) Do not keep the parts in conditions that will cause tension, but
keep them in their correct shape. Do not store too many parts
together vertically, this can cause permanent distortion of the
lower layers. Store flexible hoses straight, when possible, to
prevent tension and the increased risk of ozone cracks in the
bends.
(c) You must supply sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation.
(d) Store lip-type seals so their sealing edge will not be damages or
distorted. Do not attach labels directly to the seal. Do not
install seal rings on to fer rules and bobbins until immediately
before installation, this will prevent distortion.
(e) Keep the storage temperature in the range of 15 deg.C (59 deg.F)
21 deg.C (70 deg.F) but a minimum of 5 deg.C (41 deg.F) and a
maximum of 38 deg.C (100 deg.F) is permitted. The relative
humidity is to be 65 percent. Keep the parts at least 36 in. (0.9
m) from a source of heat.
(f) If the parts are stored as recommended in this TASK there will be
almost no limit to the storage life. It will be necessary to do
regular checks on some materials, and so the materials are
divided into three groups.
1
_ Group A
a
_ Natural rubber - MS717
These can be supplied to a customer to a maximum of five
years after the cure date. The subsequent storage life has
no limit if the material is satisfactory after inspection
of those parts that were stored for the longest time. Two
years is the maximum recommended time between inspections.
Refer to step 5.
2
_ Group B
a
_ Butyl - MS754, MS757
b
_ Neoprene (chloroprene) - MS710, MS716 (BS2752, grade C3 or
C4)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 208
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

These can be supplied to a customer to a maximum of seven
years after the cure date. The subsequent storage life has
no limit if the material is satisfactory after inspection
of those parts that were stored for the longest time. Three
years is the maximum recommended time between inspections.
c
_ Nitrile - MS727, MS735, MS743, MS744, MS747, MS765;
MSRR9454, MSRR9455; BSEM602; DTD5509, DTD5595, DTD5607.
These can be supplied to a customer to a maximum of ten
years after the cure date. The maximum storage life is 15
years.
3
_ Group X
a
_ Silicone, Fluorosilicone and Fluorocarbon (Vitron) - MS732,
MS741, MS751, MS756, MS761, MS771; MSRR9450 (MS762),
MSRR9451 (MS782), MSRR9452 (MS766), MSRR9453, MSRR9490;
BSEM608, BSEM534; DTD900/4882A, DTD5543, DTD5603, DTD5612,
DTD5613.
There is no life limit for supply to a customer or for
storage. The cure date is only an aid to monitor part
quantity.
NOTE : Parts in groups A and B (not Nitrile) supplied to a

____
customer for immediate use on engines, thus not to
be stored, could have no storage life remaining.
This is permitted because the markers storage
conditions are very good.
NOTE : Material specification numbers are only written on

____
containers.
(4) The Inspection of Parts
(a) Examine the parts for surface cracks or deterioration. Carefully

bend the part to see if it is cracked. If it is cracked discard
the part.
(b) Do not discard parts because they have a white or colored bloom
on their surface. These blooms are good protection layers and
come from the anti-oxidants used in high grade rubber.
(c) Examine parts for the defects that follow and discard if
defective:
1
_ Permanent distortion, flats and other defects.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 209
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2
_ A tacky surface or a surface that has become hard or soft.
3
_ A peeled or cracked surface when part is bent or extended.
4
_ Chafed outer covers and corrosion or damage to end connections
of hose assemblies and cable harnessess.
5
_ Corrosion of the metal in bonded rubber to metal assemblies.
6
_ Blockage of the bore (flexible hoses).
(d) Do a pressure test on flexible hoses as specified in the

applicable engine manual. When the pressure test is complete,
drain the hose, blow through with clean air and seal the ends
with blanks.
(e) Do a test on electrical cables and harnessess for resistance

where applicable. Also do a check for insulation resistance,
continuity, chafed loom and satisfactory condition of the end
connections. This will be specified in the applicable engine
manual.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-13

Page 210
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_____________________________________________
TASK 70-23-15-912-010
Connection of Electrical Connectors
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This task gives the general procedure for the connection of electrical plugs
during the maintenance of the engine.
- If an electrical plug is installed incorrectly it can cause moisture to go
in to the plug or mating connections.
- This can cause incorrect electrical signals or failure of the applicable
circuits.
- Do not remove the protective cap(s) until immediately before you connect
the plug to the mating connection.
2. ______________________
A. Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No specific clean lint free cloth
B. Consumable Materials
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Cleaning fluid (Ref. 70-30-00)
Cleaning tissues (Ref. 70-30-00)
Lockwire (Ref. 70-30-00)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-15

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

C. Referenced Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESPM 20-48-23
70-23-15-991-150 Fig. 201
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-23-15-869-050
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-23-15-912-050
A. Connection of the Electrical Connectors:
(1) Prepare the Connector and the Receptacle
(a) Remove the protective caps from the plug and the related
receptacle
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-23-15-991-150)
Keep the caps in a clean and dry bag.
(b) Clean the plug and the receptacle:
WARNING : ALWAYS MAKE SURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT VENTILATION WHEN

_______
THE CLEANING FLUID IS USED. DO NOT BREATHE THE VAPOR OR
LET IT TOUCH THE SKIN.
1
_ Examine the plug and the receptacle for contamination caused
by liquid or solid unwanted materials. If necessary, clean
with Cleaning fluid (Material No. V01-012) but always obey the
instructions that follow :
2
_ Remove contamination from the surfaces
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY A SPRAY GUN, OR USE COMPRESSED AIR, AT

_______
A PRESSURE OF MORE THAN 15 PSI.
a
_ Remove all contamination from the surfaces with a brush or
a spray gun.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-15

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Connector and Receptacle

Figure 201/TASK 70-23-15-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-15

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

b
_ If the plug or the receptacle is in such a position that
the unwanted fluid can not drain away use a clean lint free
cloth or disposable Cleaning tissues (Material No. V02-069)
to remove the fluid.
(c) Examine the plugs and the receptacles that are attached to the
harness
1
_ Examine the parts for corrosion and damage ; also, inserts
that are damaged or soaked with oil. Repair or replace as
necessary (Refer to Inspection/Check, Repair and Assembly, in
the related Component Maintenance Manual).
(d) Examine the receptacles that are attached to the unit
1
_ Examine the parts for corrosion and damage ; also inserts that
are damaged or soaked with oil. Repair or replace as necessary
(Refer to related Vendors Overhaul Manual).
(2) Connect the connector:
CAUTION : THE FULL MATING INDICATOR BAND ON THE RECEPTACLE IS NOT A

_______
STOP LINE. THIS BAND MUST ALWAYS BE FULLY CONTAINED BY THE
LEADING EDGE OF THE PLUG KNURLED NUT.
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT USE THE PLIERS, A STRAP WRENCH OR OTHER
_______
MECHANICAL DEVICE ON THE REAR KNURLED PART OF THE
CONNECTOR, THIS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CONNECTOR.
NOTE : Some connectors have lock displays (window) through the orange
____
(or red) colour must be visible to ensure correct tightening.
(a) Align the master key on the plug with the receptacle master
key-way
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-23-15-991-150)
(b) Use light hand pressure to engage the plug with the receptacle.
(c) With the threads correctly engaged install the plug coupling nut,
in a clockwise direction, on to the receptacle threads. Push the
connector with a side-to-side movement, in to the receptacle and
continuously tighten the coupling nut by hand, while you do this,
until it is tight. Make sure that the red visual indicator band
cannot be seen.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-15

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

NOTE : Where you cannot easily get access to the connector, you
____
can use insulated-jawed pliers, such as Glenair TG69
pliers or equivalent, to tighten the coupling nut.
(d) TORQUE the coupling nut, when necessary, to the limits specified
in the related procedure. Use an applicable strap wrench.
(e) When necessary, safety with Lockwire (Material No. V02-126)
(f) IDG feeder harness connector.
1
_ Do a pin retention check of the sockets (Ref. ESPM 20-48-23).
2
_ Do not clean the contacts with abrasive material.
3
_ Tighten the connector by hand until the orange (or red) color
is visible in the lock display (window).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-23-15

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

LIST OF MATERIALS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_________________________________________
TASK 70-30-00-918-010
Consumable Materials Index
WARNING : BEFORE YOU USE A MATERIAL REFERED TO, IN THIS PUBLICATION, YOU MUST
_______
KNOW ALL OF THE APPLICABLE PRECAUTIONS:
THESE PRECAUTIONS TELL YOU HOW TO:
- USE THE MATERIAL SAFELY
- KEEP THE MATERIAL SAFELY
- DISCARD THE MATERIAL SAFELY
READ THE SAFETY DATA SHEETS FROM THE MANUFACTURER OR THE SUPPLIER OF
THE MATERIAL TO LEARN THE RECOMMANDED PRECAUTIONS.
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
Not Applicable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-30-00-869-052
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-30-00-910-050
A. General
NOTE : The complete list of materials can be found in the IAE Overhaul
____
Processes and Consumable Index.
(1) This page block gives details of all the consumable materials that
are required during maintenance of the engine.
(2) The index is divided into three sections:
(a) An alphanumeric index which lists the consumable materials in

alphabetical order.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) A materials index which lists the consumable materials by section.
The sections used are:
(a) V01 - Processing and Cleaning Materials
(b) V02 - Processing Sundries
(c) V04 - Jointing Compounds and Greases
(d) V05 - Polishing, Abrasive and Blasting
(e) V06 - Inspecting
(f) V07 - Paints, Varnishes and Thinners
(g) V08 - Bonding Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers
(h) V10 - Oils, Fluids and Lubricants
(i) V12 - Packing
(4) A list of Suppliers Names and Addresses which are in order

alphanumerically by SUPPLIER CODE.
Subtask 70-30-00-918-052
B. Alphanumeric Index
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DESIGNATION ITEM NUMBER
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abrasive Medium V05-003
Acetone V01-031
Acetone V01-060
Adhesive Tape (Masking) V02-001
Adhesive Tape (Masking) V02-005
Adhesive Tape V02-019
Adhesive Tape (Electrical) V02-148
Adhesive Tape V02-271
Adhesive V08-021
Adhesive, Two-Part Epoxy V08-028
Air Drying Enamel V07-038
Alkali Cleaner V01-300
R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 202
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alkali Gel Cleaner V01-434
Alkali Gel Cleaner V01-435
Alkali Gel Carbon Remover V01-454
Aluminum Oxide Abrasive Paper V05-073
Aluminum Oxide Abrasive Paper V05-074
Anti-Corrosion Additive V11-008
Anti Corrosion Inhibiting Fluid V10-014
Anti Galling Compound V10-031
Anti Galling Compound V10-032
Anti-Icing Additive V11-016
Anti-Icing Additive V11-017
Antigallant V10-055
Anti-Smoke Additive V11-022
Anti Seize Compound Dry
Film Lubricant V10-003
Anti Seize Compound V10-070
Anti Seize Paste V10-129
Anti-Static Additive V11-018
Anti-Static Additive V11-019
Approved Engine Oil V10-077A
Approved Engine Oil V10-077B
Approved Engine Oil V10-077C
Approved Engine Oil V10-077D
Approved Engine Oil V10-077E
Approved Engine Oil V10-077F
Approved Engine Oil V10-077G
Approved Engine Oil V10-077H
Approved Engine Oil V10-077I
Approved Engine Oil V10-077J
Bagging Film V02-222
Biocide Additive V11-021

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 203
Nov 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bonded Lubricant V10-106
Breather Cloth V02-166
Bright Aluminium V07-079
Brush V02-175
Brush (Camel or Squirrel Hair) V02-018
Brush Paint V02-102
Brush, Tymex Nylon V02-087
Catalyst V07-077
Catalyst V07-097
Catalyst V07-139
Catalyst for Gloss Finish V07-118R
Catalyst for Matt Finish V07-120
Catalyst Agent V08-077
Chemical Conversion Coating V07-028
Chromate Conversion Coating (Alocrom 1200) V01-275
Civil Aviation Kerosene V11-001
Civil Aviation Kerosene
Low Freeze V11-002
Cleaner V01-231
Cleaner - Gas Path V01-230
Cleaning Fluid (Dichloromethane CH2C12) V01-210
Cleaning Fluid (Methylethylketone) V01-076
Cleaning Fluid (Trichloroethane, Inhibited
and Stabilized) V01-001
Cleaning Fluid (Trichloroethane, Inhibited
and Stabilized) V01-002
Cleaning Fluid (Trichlorethylene) V01-003
Cleaning Solvent V01-338
Cleaning Solvent V01-348
Clear Polyurethane V07-098
Compressor Washing Fluid V01-232
Cold Curing Silicone Compound V08-013
Cold Curing Silicone Compound V08-043
Colloidal Molybdenum Disulphide V10-005
Conditioning Discs V05-186
Corrosion Preventive V10-051
Cotton Swab V02-174
Desiccant (Silica Gel) V02-075
Disposable Cleaning Tissues V02-069
Distilled or Deionized Water V01-201
Dry Developer V06-032
Dry Film Lubricant Paint Rapid Relubrication V04-016
Rapid Relubrication System V04-017
EEL Resisting Touch-Up V07-008

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 204
Nov 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EEL Resisting Touch-Up Enamel V07-011
Engine Cleaning Solution V01-298
Epoxy Primer V07-140
Epoxy Primer Catalyst V07-081
Epoxy Matt Finish Black V07-117
Epoxy Gloss Finish White V07-119
Ethyl Alcohol C2H50H V01-007
Fiberglass Cloth V08-049
Filler, Two Pack V08-006
Filter Paper V02-011
Fluoresant Penetrant V06-018
Fluid V10-045
R Fluid V10-045A
Fuel Additive V11-004
Garnet Paper V05-016
Garnet Paper V05-017
Gas Path Cleaner V01-378
Gas Path Cleaner V01-379
Gloss Base V07-078
Grease V10-056
Hardener V08-047
Hardener V08-110
High Temperature Anti-Seize
Lubricant V10-109
High Temperature Glass Cloth Tape V02-050
R
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120A
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120B
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120C
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120D
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120E
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120F
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120G

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 205
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120H
Hot Paint Stripper V01-120J
Icing and Corrosion Inhibitor V11-025
Indicator V02-076
Isopropyl Alcohol V01-012
Isopropyl Alcohol V01-124
R Isopropyl Alcohol V01-410
Jointing Compound V04-004
Jointing Compound V05-057A
Jointing Compound V05-057B
Kerosine V01-277
Lacing Tape V02-159
Lacing Tape V02-184
Lacing Tape V02-185
Lint Free Cloth V02-099
Lint Free Gloves V02-097
Liquid Paraffin V10-060
Locking Compound V08-026
Lockwire V02-119
Lockwire V02-126
Lockwire V02-127
Lockwire V02-138
Lockwire V02-141
Lockwire V02-146
Lockwire V02-147
Lockwire V02-156
Lockwire V02-176
Lubricant V10-067
Lubricating Oil V10-066
Lubricating Fluid V10-121
Lubricity Improver Additive V11-020
Marker V06-069
Marking Pen V06-131
Masking Tape V02-024
Masking Tape V02-178
R
Metal Marking Crayon V02-081
Metal Spraying Stopping-off Compound V03-398
Mineral Oil V10-020
Mineral Oil V10-023
Mineral Oil V10-103

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 206
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Moisture Resistant Tape V02-039
R
Non-Aqueous Developer V06-030
Oil Seal Additive V01-121
Paint Brush V02-004
Penetrating Oil V10-058
Petrolatum V10-041
Petroleum Jelly V10-038
Polishing Discs V05-185
Polysulphide Compound V08-142
Polysulphide Sealant V08-146
Polysulphide Sealant V08-125
Porous Release Film V02-334
Primer V08-032
Primer Base V08-029
Primer Converter V07-067
Primer for Silicoset 151, 152, 153 V08-014
PVC Sheet V12-004
Release agent (Freecote 33) V02-158
Release Film V02-223
Resin V08-048
Resin V08-050
Resin V08-069
Resin V08-109
Safety cable V02-272
Safety cable V02-283A

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 207
Feb 01/08

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Scotch Brite V05-126
Sealant V08-024
Sealant V08-030
Sealant V08-033
Sealant V08-074
Sealant V08-115
Sealing Compound V08-141
Sealing Tape V02-006
Silicone Adhesive Polyester Tape V02-224
Silicone Rubber Compound V08-031
Silicone Rubber Compound V08-045
Silicone Grease V04-007
Solvent V01-438
Solvent Cleaner V01-005
Solvent Cleaner (Methylisobutylketone) V01-457
Stoddard Solvent V01-297
Surface Inspection Fluid V06-021
Synthetic Grease V10-073
Syringe V02-162
Teflon-Based Lubricant V10-108
Teflon Tape V02-007
Teflon Tape V02-160
Teflon Tape V02-195
Temporary Marker Pencil/Crayon V02-121
Temporary Marker Pencil/Crayon V02-121A
Temporary Marker Pencil/Crayon V02-121B
Temporary Marker Pencil/Crayon V02-121C
Temporary Marker Pencil/Crayon V02-121D
Temporary Rust Preventive V10-015
Thermal Stability Additive V11-015
Thinner V07-066
Thinner V07-076
Thinner V07-096
Thinner V07-082
Ties V06-086
Toughened Acrylic Adhesive +
Initiator V08-114
Transparent Tape V02-151

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 208
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Two-Pack Epoxy Finish White and Catalyst V07-007
Two-Pack Epoxy Primer and Catalyst V07-080
Ultrasonic couplant V06-148
Vacuum Bag Tape Sealant V12-045
Vacuum Bag Tape Sealant V12-046
VPI Impregnated Paper V12-013
Waterproof Abrasive Paper V05-019
White Nylon Gloves V02-100
White Spirit V01-115
Wide-Cut Fuel V11-003
Subtask 70-30-00-918-053
C. List of Consumable Products
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|ITEM |MATERIAL | | |CODE
|NUMBER |DESIGNATION |SPECIFICATION |USAGE |SUPPLIER
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V01 PROCESSING AND

CLEANING MATERIALS
V01-001 1.1.1 Trichloroethane, BS4487 : 1969 To clean IAE124

Inhibited and Chlorothene VG mechanical K6835
Stabilized components 96717
MIL-T-81533 K6835
MTH 303 (MTU Ref)
OMAT : 1/21 (RR Ref)
V01-002 Trichloroethane, DEF TS367 To clean

Inhibited and mechanical
Stabilized components
M6050/Genklene LV K7625
OMAT: 1/21A (RR Ref)
V01-003 1.1.2 B.A. 580 - 1963 To clean K7766

Trichlorethylene Fed Spec 1956 mechanical
Inhibited and O-T - 643A TYPE 2 components

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 209
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stabilized MTH 327 (MTU Ref)
OMAT: 1/21B (RR Ref)
Triklone N 70657
K6835
LOCAL
V01-005 Solvent Cleaner EXXSOL D60 To clean 72190

MTH 362 (MTU Ref) mechanical
components
V01-007 Ethyl Alcohol BDH28304 To clean LOCAL

C2H50H GPR mechanical K6835
MTH 133 (MTU Ref) components 24835
OMAT: 156 (RR Ref)
PMC 9009 (P&W Ref)
V01-012 Isopropyl Alcohol Isopropyl Alcohol To clean K6835

(CH3)2 CHOH A.G mechanical LOCAL
components U1185
OMAT: 1/119 (RR Ref)
V01-031 Acetone Acetone C.G. 70657

(CH3)2CO K6835
B.S.509: 1964 K7766

BDH26287 or BDH2723 LOCAL
K3504
U1185
MTH 169 (98%) (MTU Ref) 24853

O-A-51 81348
OMAT: 150 (RR Ref)
PMC 9008 (P&W Ref)
V01-060 Acetone 392-101010 06637

(CH3)2CO 392-101010(Fiat Ref)
Acetone A.G. 06637

24853
K3504
K6835

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 210
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LOCAL
BDH 10003 U1185

MTH 169 (96%) (MTU Ref)
OMAT: 1/176 (RR Ref)
V01-076 Cleaning Fluid BS1940:1968 To clean K7766

(Methylethylketone) METHYLETHYLKETONE T.G. mechanical K6835
BDH 26268 components K3504
24853
U1185
LOCAL
OMAT: 135 (RR Ref)

PMC 9076 (P&W Ref)
V01-115 White Spirit B.S. 245 To clean IAE61

mechanical K3504
components K6413
LOCAL
M6035 K7625
OMAT:102 (RR Ref)
P-D-680 TYI or TYII K3504
V01-120 Hot Paint Stripper TURCO 5668 To clean 0BYN5

OMAT: 1/226 (RR REF) mechanical D8908
SPMC83 (PW REF) components IAE246
IAE386
IAE388
K0519
K6835
V01-120A Hot Paint Stripper ARDROX 6801 To clean K6858

OMAT: 1/226A (RR REF) mechanical
components
V01-120B Hot Paint Stripper ARDROX 2302 To clean K6835

OMAT: 1/226B (RR REF) mechanical
SPMC 81 (PW REF) components
V01-120C Hot Paint Stripper HT2230 To clean 55208

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 211
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OMAT: 1/226D (RR REF) mechanical
components
V01-120D Hot Paint Stripper ARDROX 5300W To clean K6858

OMAT: 1/226E (RR REF) mechanical
components
V01-120E Hot Paint Stripper CEE-BEE A477 To clean U5702

OMAT: 1/226F (RR REF) mechanical
SPMC 152 (PW REF) components
V01-120F Hot Paint Stripper HT2243 To clean 55208

OMAT: 1/226G (RR REF) mechanical
components
V01-120G Hot Paint Stripper POWERSTRIP 1100 To clean K6835

OMAT: 1/226H (RR REF) mechanical
components
V01-120H Hot Paint Stripper DELETED
V01-120J Hot Paint Stripper KEMSTRIP 596 MAGCHEM To clean 35502

OMAT: 1/226K (RR REF) mechanical K4754
SPMC 174-2 (PW REF) components
V01-121 Oil Seal Additive Deleted see COMAT IAE386

01-120
V01-124 Isopropyl Alcohol BDH 29694 To clean U1185

Isopropyl Alcohol GPR mechanical 24853
components K6835
LOCAL
OMAT: 1/40 (RR Ref)

PMC 9094 (P&W Ref) T.G.
TT-I-735 81348
V01-125 Deleted-Use To clean

V01-001 mechanical
components
V01-201 Distilled or 389-500911 (Fiat Ref) To clean 06637

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 212
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Deionized Water mechanical
components
Distilled or Deionized LOCAL

Water (pH 5.0 - 8.0)
PMC 3067 (P&W Ref)/C.G.
V01-210 Methylene Chloride BDH 28096 To clean K6835

CH2CL2 Methylene Chloride T.G. mechanical 24853
components K3504
OMAT: 169 (RR Ref) U1185

LOCAL
V01-230 Compressor Washing Adrox 6345/OMAT: 1070D To clean 37127

Fluid (RR Ref) mechanical IAE108
components K6858
Adrox 6367/OMAT: 1070F 37127

(RR Ref) IAE108
K6858
MSRR9914 (RR Ref)
MSRR9914/OMAT: 1070F 37127

(RR Ref)
MSRR9914/OMAT: 1070G
(RR Ref)
OMAT: 1070 (RR Ref)
Rivanaes R-MC G21/OMAT: K6835

1070E (RR Ref)
SPMC 87-13 (P&W Ref)
ZOK 27 LA/OMAT: 1070G
(RR Ref)
ZOK 27-DETERGENT TYPE 71361

IAE112
V01-231 Cleaner MSRR9914 (RR Ref) To clean K2884

OMAT: 1070B (RR Ref) mechanical 23373
TURBO CLEAN components 37127
B1082

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 213
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K2828
K2884
K6858
K8095
V01-232 Compressor Washing Castrol ICD 177 To clean 2R128

Fluid mechanical IAE280
Components IAE281
IAE282
MSRR 9914 (RR Ref) IAE309
OMAT: 1070A (RR Ref) IAE395
Techniclean GT2 K0132

K6835
V01-275 Chromate Conversion (MIL-C-81706 TYPE C1A) To protect K0519

Coating Alodine 1200 surfaces 71410
OMAT: 175D (RR Ref) after repair
Part A: Alocrom 1200 MP K0519

0004 K6835
K7625
Part B: Alocrom 1200 MP K0519

0005 K6835
V01-277 Kerosine Commercial Grade To remove IAE108

debris from
oil filters
Derd 2494 C.G. IAE108
Exxsol D80/OMAT: 101B LOCAL

(RR Ref)
MIL-T-5624 TYPE JP5 IAE108
OMAT: 101 (RR Ref) LOCAL

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 214
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SAFRASOL/OMAT: 101A IAE310
(RR Ref)
V01-297 Stoddard Solvent OMAT: 102A To clean LOCAL

mechanical
components
Type 1 to ASTM D484 LOCAL

52096
K6835
V01-298 Engine Cleaning MC58(100-5-0058) To clean LOCAL

Solution mechanical K6835
components K5635
85570
OMAT: 176 (RR Ref)
V01-300 Alkali Cleaner BLUE GOLD IND. CLEANER To clean IAE63

PMC 1284 (P&W Ref) mechanical
OMAT 1/24H (RR Ref) components
V01-338 Cleaning Solvent DESOCLEAN 45 P-D680TY1 To clean ONYS9

OMAT:1/257 (RR Ref) mechanical K6835
PMC 9060 (P&W Ref) components 85570
V01-339 Alkali Cleaner CEE BEE A-7x7 To clean 71361

SPMC 104 (P&W Ref) mechanical
components
V01-340 Alkali Cleaner SPMC 105 (P&W Ref) To clean OBYN5

OMAT 1/24K (RR Ref) mechanical
components
Turco 5948 DPM OBYN5

IAE386
IAE387
IAE388
V01-348 Cleaning Solvent Alconox To clean 17534

PMC 1610 (P&W Ref) mechanical
components

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 215
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V01-378 Gas Path Cleaner Ardrox 6343 To clean 37127
mechanical B1082
components C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K2884
K6858
K8095
Ardrox 6343-Solvent Type 23373

SPMC 87-1 (P&W Ref)
V01-379 Gas Path Cleaner Ardrox 6345 To clean 23373

mechanical 37127
components B1082
C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K2884
K8095
Ardrox 6345-Detergent K6858

Type
SPMC 87-2 (P&W Ref)
SPMC 108 (P&W Ref)
V01-410 Isopropyl alcohol Reagent grade Processing 0AL61

(Anhydrous) PX1864 Cleaning LOCAL
PMC 9016 (P&W Ref) Chemicals
V01-422 Alkali Cleaner ARDROX 6333 To clean 23373

mechanical K6858
components
SPMC 107 (P&W Ref)
V01-434 Alkaline Gel Cleaner SPMC 109 (P&W Ref) To clean OBYN5
TURCO 5948 DPM THICH mechanical
components
V01-435 Alkaline Gel Cleaner AVIAWASH GREEN GEL To clean ONOL2

SPMC 110 (P&W Ref) mechanical
components

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 216
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V01-438 Solvent TURCO SOLVENT NO.6646 Tacle on 0BYN5
OMAT: 1/270 (RR REF) mechanical
RIMS 1017 (ROHR REF) components
V01-454 Alkaline Gel Carbon DUBOIS AE-3003 To clean 72008

Remover SPMC 135 (P+W REF) mechanical
components
V01-455 Alkaline Gel Carbon TURCO 5805 To clean 0BYN5

Remover SPMC 136 (P+W REF) mechanical
components
V01-456 Alkaline Gel Carbon CEE-BEE ALKO To clean 71361

Remover SPMC 137 (P+W) mechanical
components
V01-457 Solvent Cleaner To clean 71361

(Methylisobutylketone) mechanical
components
V02 PROCESSING SUNDRIES
V02-001 Adhesive Tape OMAT: 230 (RR Ref) To prevent

(Masking) ingress of
unwanted
material
Zinc Oxide AT 142 K6835

LOCAL
V02-004 Paint Brush OMAT: 2/12 To apply

surface
protection
Soft Camel Hair K6835

LOCAL
V02-005 Adhesive Tape AT 7 BLACK, WATERPROOF To prevent U0415

(masking) OMAT: 2/94 (RR REF) ingress of K6835
unwanted
material
V02-006 Sealing Tape Scotch 425 To protect K0993

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 217
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DEF MIL-T-23397 Type2 cover
V02-007 Teflon Tape OMAT: 299 (RR Ref) Masking K2096

Self Adhesive Coated tape
Glass Fabric Tape
TYGAFLOR P.T.F.E. K6835
TYPE64/OMAT/ 299A K6835

(RR Ref)
V02-011 Filter Paper OMAT: 1/143 (RR Ref) To collect 24853

WHATMAN No.42 debris for K6835
analysis LOCAL
U1185
V02-018 Brush (Camel or OMAT: 215 (RR Ref) To apply K0136

Squirrel Hair) fluids
Pencil Size No.6 K0136

(H-B-118T3C1SC3/8) K6835
V02-019 Adhesive Tape Paper 3M HT214 To prevent 94960

Heat Resistant OMAT: 2/40 (RR Ref) ingress of K3312
Masking Tape Sellotape unwanted K6835
material
V02-024 Masking Tape (Crepe No.442A and 476 Tape 82784

Paper Backing) PMC 4000 1 to 8, -10
(P&W Ref)
V02-039 Moisture Resistant No Longer Approved

Tape
V02-040 Moisture Resistant PMC 4141 -1 thru 6 To prevent IAE358

Tape (P&W Ref) ingress of
TESA 53910 unwanted
material
V02-041 Moisture Resistant Kendall No.231 To prevent 80769

Tape PMC 4141 -1 thru 5 ingress of
(P&W Ref) unwanted
material

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 218
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Polyken No.222 80769
V02-042 Moisture Resistant Permacel No.691 To prevent 99742

Tape Cloth, Waterproof ingress of
PMC 4141 -1 thru 5 unwanted
(P&W Ref) material
V02-044 Moisture Resistant CC 150-01B To prevent IAE05

Tape PMC 4141 -1 thru -5 ingress of
(P&W Ref) unwanted
material
V02-045 Moisture Resistant NC 170-43 To prevent IAE07

Tape PMC 4141 -1 thru -5 ingress of
(P&W Ref) unwanted
material
SAD-19 97631
V02-046 Moisture Resistant Moisture Resistant To prevent 12861

Tape Tape CE-1 ingress of
PMC 4141 -1 thru -5 unwanted
(P&W Ref) material
V02-050 High Temperature No. 36 glass Cloth Tape 75381

Glass cloth tape PMC 4273-1 Thru-6
(P&W Ref)
V02-051 High Temperature Permacel No. 212 99742

Glass Cloth Tape PMC 4273-1 Thru 8
(P&W Ref)
V02-052 High Temperature Fluorolin 104 58933

Glass Cloth Tape IAE09
PMC 4273-1 Thru -6 IAE358

and -8
(P&W Ref)
T and F No. 03806 or 58933

03807
TESA 4618 IAE358

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 219
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V02-053 High Temperature 7001-Glass cloth 2E909
Glass Cloth Tape
No. 361 Glass cloth tape 76381

PMC 4273-1 Thru-6 and -8
(P&W Ref)
V02-069 Disposable cleaning OMAT: 2/67 (RR Ref) To remove

Tissues unwanted
material
Workhorse/Kimwipe 33591
No. 7105 IAE319
IAE320
IAE321
K4182
LOCAL
V02-075 Desiccant, Silica Gel Desiccant Silica Gel To protect 72406

Misc 00132-00 items in
(P&W Ref) storage
V02-076 Indicator Humidity Indicator To indicate IAE14

Cards Misc 00133-00 condition of
(P&W Ref) desiccant
V02-081 Metal Marking Veritian No. 753 Silver To identify IAE67

Pencil (Hard) Anadel No. 1936 Silver position of 70362
Colorbrite Silver No. components 32988
2101
Design Spectracolor 32988

Silver 1428
PMC 4059-7 (P&W Ref)
V02-087 Brush, Tymex Nylon MISC 00187-01 (P&W Ref) General LOCAL
Nylon 1/2 x 1-3/4 purpose
or 1 x 1-3/4
V02-097 Lint Free Gloves Lint Free Gloves General

purpose
OMAT: 2/114 (RR REF) LOCAL

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 220
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MISC 00127-00 (P+W REF)
V02-099 Lint Free Cloth Lint Free Cloth General LOCAL

purpose
V02-100 White Nylon Gloves White Nylon Gloves General

purpose
MISC 00127 (P+W REF) LOCAL
V02-102 Brush, Paint MISC 00188-02 (P&W Ref) General LOCAL

Paint Brush purpose
V02-119 Lockwire AMS5687 To safety 81343

MS9226-04 (0.032in. Dia) items LOCAL
QQ-W-423 Type 302 51563
V02-121 Temporary Marker BEROL VERITHIN (HARD To safety IAE304

Pencil/Crayon TYPE) items K5720
OMAT: 261 (RR REF) K6835
LOCAL
V02-121A Temporary Marker STAEDLER MARS To identify IAE304

Pencil/Crayon OMNICHROME MED position of K6835
OMAT: 261A (RR REF) components
V02-121B Temporary Marker STYLE NO.705 PENCIL To identify K6835

Pencil/Crayon OMAT: 261B (RR REF) position of
components
V02-121C Temporary Marker ALL-STABILO 8008 To identify IAE370

Pencil/Crayon OMAT: 261C (RR REF) position of IAE371
components K6835
V02-121D Temporary Marker STONAL 222 To identify K6835

Pencil/Crayon OMAT: 261D (RR REF) position of
components
V02-126 Lockwire (0.028 to 0.031 in.) To safety IAE61

items K6835
AMS5689/OMAT: 238 58401

(RR Ref)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 221
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A-580 TYPE 58401
321/OMAT: 238B (RR Ref)
ASTM A-580 321/OMAT: 58401

238B (RR Ref)
MS9226-0350.025in)/OMAT
238A (RR Ref)
OMAT: 238 (RR Ref) K6835

PT. No. 50190006/OMAT: 58401
238B (RR ref)
Staybrite DTD.189A K6835
V02-127 Lockwire MS9226-3 (0.025 in.) To safety LOCAL

items
V02-138 Lockwire AMS 5689 To safety 81343

AS 44725-1 items LOCAL
DTD 189A (0.5 mm)
V02-141 Lockwire AS 3214-02 To safety K7766

(0.031in.) items LOCAL
(0.8 mm)
V02-146 Lockwire MS20995C20 To safety LOCAL

(0.5 mm) items
V02-147 Lockwire MS20995C32 To safety LOCAL

(0.8 mm) items
V02-148 Adhesive Tape OMAT: 296 (RR Ref) To secure

(electrical) cable in
clamp
Scotch No.69 (White) 76381

94960
K0993
K6835
LOCAL
V02-151 Transparent Tape OMAT: 283 (RR Ref) To secure

items in

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 222
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
position
Silicone Polyester 1602 76381

94960
IAE61
K0993
K3312
K6835
V02-156 Lockwire MS2095N32 (0.8 mm) To safety LOCAL

items 58401
V02-158 Release agent 51563

(Freecote 33)
V02-159 Lacing Tape OMAT: 274 (RR Ref) To secure

items in
position
TO85 IAE218
K6835
V02-160 Teflon Tape Tynaflor P.T.F.E. Masking K0680

(0.5 in.) Tape K6835
V02-162 Syringe Syringe, Injection Fluid 51563

Injection LOCAL
V02-166 Breather Cloth RC-3000-10 General 51563

purpose 85670
V02-174 Cotton Swabs Cotton Swabs To clean LOCAL

mechanical
components
V02-175 Brush Cannings Grey Coolair To clean K0136

2851B mechanical LOCAL
Fibre, 8 in. x 2 in. components OA7F7
wide K6835
OMAT: 231 (RR Ref) K6835
V02-176 Lockwire MS20995N20 (0.5 mm) To safety LOCAL

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 223
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
items
V02-178 Masking Tape Masking Tape No.250 To prevent 76381

ingress of
unwanted
material
V02-184 Lacing Tape 718G To secure 82110

MIL-T-43435B items in 81349
position
V02-185 Lacing Tape MIL-T-43435B To secure 81349

items in 82110
position
MIL-T-43435B: 18DH
V02-195 Teflon Tape 3M62 Masking 76381

MIL-I-23594 tape 81349
JCR-263 (JAEC REF)
V02-222 Bagging Film HS-8171 To secure 85670

(JAEC REF) items in
position
V02-223 Release Film A-5000 To release 85670

Release Film (JAEC Ref) Parts
V02-224 Silicone Adhesive FLASHTAPE 2 To secure 85670

Polyester Tape (JAEC REF) items in
position
V02-271 Adhesive Tape 3M-Y9473 To secure 94960

(double sided) OMAT:2/117(RR REF) items in IAE200
position K0993
V02-272 Safety cable Daniels C10-212 Safety 11855

(DIA 0.032in. cabling of C3471
Length 12in.) components U0419
V02-273 Safety cable Bergen K30B12 Safety 70958

(DIA 0.032in. cabling of H7503
Length 12in.) components IAE384

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 224
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SA221

(DIA 0.032in cabling of U0419
Length 18in.) components

SA221


SA221


SA221
V02-280 Safety cable Daniels F10-2 End securing 11860

(nominal DIA of safety C3471
0.032in.) cables U0419
V02-281 Safety cable Bergen F30B End securing 70958

(nominal DIA of safety H7503
0.032in.) cables IAE384
SA221

V02-283 Safety cable DIA 0.020in. Safety 70958

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 225
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Length 18in. cabling of
components
V02-283A Safety cable Bergen K20B12 Safety 70985

Length 12in.) components SA221
70958
IAE384


IAE384



IAE384
V02-289 Safety cable Daniels F10-1 End securing 11859

(nominal DIA of safety C3471
0.020in.) cables U0419
V02-290 Safety cable Bergen F20B End securing 70958

(nominal DIA of safety H7503
0.020in.) cables SA221
IAE384
V02-334 Porous Release A5000P3, OMAT 2/154 To release IAE78

Film (RR-REF), JCR 302 (JAEC parts IAE74
REF)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 226
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V03
V03-398 Metal Spraying Metco Anti-Bond IAE103

Stopping-off Compound 39918 IAE195
K1030
V04 JOINTING COMPOUNDS

GREASES
V04-004 Jointing Compound Hylomar Aero Grade To seal IAE200

Light joint faces K3237
K3504
K6835
OMAT: 4/46 (RR Ref)
V04-005 Jointing Compound DTD 900/4586 To seal IAE200

joint faces K3237
K3504
K6835
Hylomar Aero Grade Heavy IAE200

K3237
K3504
K6835
OMAT: 4/47 (RR Ref)
V04-007 Silicone Grease AMEND. 1 (DC4) To lubricate 21752

AMS 3087 seals 71984
IAE222
DEF STAN 59-10/2(MS 4) IAE275

IAE276
IAE277
IAE285
K7750
MIL-S-8660B 71984
NATO S-736 K6835
OMAT: 418 (RR Ref)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 227
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
V04-011 Jointing Compound DTD 900/4344 To seal K3504
OMAT: 423 (RR Ref) joint faces
Silkolene 762 K0007

K6835
LOCAL
V04-016 Dry Film Lubricant PL 470 IAE441

Paint Rapid OMAT: 4/70 (RR Ref) K3504
Relubrication System IAE200
V04-017 Rapid Relubrication OMAT: 4/75 (RR Ref) IAE441

System V2500
V05 POLISHING, ABRASIVE

AND BLASTING
V05-003 Abrasive Medium 120 Grade (A-A-1045T1) To remove 89204

signs of
damage
Aluminum Oxide K6835

120-220 Mesh
ANSI B74-12 IAE241

U1490
CSS.12 44197
FEPA 32-GB K2769
OMAT: 146 (RR Ref)
V05-016 Garnet Paper (A-A-1201 CLASS 2) To remove K5991

Grit Size 80, Grade 0 signs of 44197
damage A2549
IAE302
K3895
K6835
OMAT: 5/97 (RR Ref)
V05-017 Garnet Paper A-A-1201 Class 2 To remove K5991

Grit Size 60, Grade 0.5 signs of 44197
damage IAE302

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 228
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
K2549
K3895
K6835
OMAT: 5/98 (RR Ref)
V05-019 Waterproof Silicon (A-A-1047A) To remove K3895

Carbide Abrasive Grit Size 400 signs of IAE241
Paper damage K3895
K6835
OMAT: 5/31 (RR Ref)
V05-020 Waterproof Silicon A-A-1047A To remove K3895

Carbide Abrasive Grit Size 320 signs of K6835
Paper damage
OMAT: 5/33 (RR Ref)

Carbide Abrasive Grit Size 240 signs of 44197
Paper damage
OMAT: 5/35 (RR Ref)
V05-057 Jointing Compound HYLOMAR AEROGRADE 32M To seal 60543

MEDIUM GRADE joint IAE290
PWA 36000-3 (P+W REF) foces IAE291
IAE451
V05-057A Jointing Compound HPF 490200 To seal IAE290

MEDIUM GRADE joint
foces
V05-057B Jointing Compound HYLOMAR PL-32 To seal IAE451

OMAT: 4/47 (RR REF) joint
PWA 36000-3 (P+W REF) foces

Carbide Abrasive Grit size 600 signs of K6835
Paper damage

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 229
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OMAT:
5/29 (RR
Ref)
V05-073 Aluminum Oxide Grit Size 300 To remove 06565

Abrasive paper signs of 51563
damage 52096
K3895
K6835
LOCAL
V05-074 Aluminum Oxide Grit Size 180 To remove 06565

Abrasive paper signs of 51563
damage 52096
K3895
K6835
LOCAL
V05-126 Scotch Brite MIL-A-99262A Type 1 To clean K0993

Grade A mechanical
OMAT: 583 (RR Ref) components
Type A.7747 Very K0993

Fine-Maroon K6835
V05-185 Polishing Discs SCOTCH-BRITE ROLOC To remove K0993

DISC, ROLOC 3 IN. A signs of 28112
MED, JCR-310 (JAEC damage
REF)
V05-186 Conditioning SCOTCH-BRITE To remove K0996

Discs SURFACE signs of 28112
CONDITIONING DISCS damage
JCR-311 (JAEC REF)
V06 INSPECTING
V06-018 Fluorescent Penetrant 668 (Burmah Castrol) To identify U0638

985-P14 (Ardrox) cracks 23373
B1082
C1308
IAE108
IAE206

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 230
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
K6858
K8095
F-6A-SP/1 (EISHIN IAE356

KAGAKU)
FP 95A (m) (MET-L-CHEK) 98733

P230 (Marktec) IAE66
O 41H1 (Turco) OBYN5
PMC 4353 (P&W Ref)
RC 65 (SHERWIN) 21405
ZL 27A (Magnaflux) 37676
V06-021 Surface Inspection MSRR 9015 (RR Ref) To identify K3504

fluid NML 21 cracks K6835
OMAT: 641 (RR Ref) LOCAL
V06-022 Fluorescent Penetrant 668 (Burmah Castrol) To identify U0638

cracks 23373
37127
B1082
C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K6858
K8095
F-6A-SP/1 (EISHIN IAE356

KAGAKU)

P60H2 (Turco) OBYN5
PMC 4354 (P&W Ref)
ZL 37 (Magnaflux) 37676
V06-030 Non Aqueous Developer 9D1B (Ardrox) To identify 23373

cracks 37127
B1082
C1308

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 231
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IAE108
IAE206
K6858
K8095
D 100 (Sherwin) 21405

D701 (Marktec) IAE66
D701 (MEK-L-CHECK) 98733
F-4S (NT)/1 (Eishin IAE356
Kagaku)
NAD (Turco) OBYN5

PMC 4375 (P&W Ref)
ZP 9F (Magnaflux) 37676
V06-032 Dry Developer 9D4A (Ardrox) To identify 23373

cracks 37127
B1082
C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K6858
K8095
D700 (Marktec)
D72A (MEK-L-CHECK)
D 90G (Sherwin)
DD2B (Turco)
F-5D/1 (Eishin Kagaku)
PD 3 (Ely Chemical)
PMC 4356 (P&W Ref)
IAE66
98733
21405
OBYN5
IAE356
UO638
ZP 4B (Magnaflux) 37676
V06-063 Fluorescent Penetrant 555 (Ely Chemical) To identify U0638

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 232
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
985-P12 (Ardrox) cracks 23373
37127
B1082
C1308
IAE108
IAE206
K6858
K8095
F-5D/1 (Eishin Kagaku) IAE356

F-FD/1 (Eishin Kagaku) IAE356
P31 H1 (Turco) OBYN5
PMC 4352 (P&W Ref)
ZL 2C (Magnaflux) 37676

970-P24 (Brent Europe) cracks K6858
FP 92 B (m) (MET-L-CHEK) 98733
HM 406 (SHERWIN) 21405
P 134D (Ardrox) 23373
PMC 4351 (P&W Ref)
WP 100H (Turco) OBYN5

ZL 60D (Magnaflux) 37676

970-P25E (Brent Europe) cracks K6858
F-4A-C/1 (Eishin Kagaku) IAE356
FP903 (MET-L-CHEK) 98733
HM 604 (SHERWIN) 21405
P 135E (Ardrox) 23373
PMC 4360 (P&W Ref)
WP170LS (Turco) OBYN5

ZL 67 (Magnaflux) 37676
V06-069 Marker Marks-a-Lot To identify IAE207

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 233
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
the position
of a
component
V06-086 Ties PMC 4272 (P&W Ref) 18992

Special Wire Ties
V06-131 Marking Pen PMC 4421 (P&W Ref) To identify

Sharpie Marker the position
of a
component
No.30001 Black, 86874

Sharpie Marker
No.30002 Red 86874

Sharpie Marker
No.30003 Blue 86874
V06-148 Ultrasonic couplant Sonotrace/OMAT: 655 57869

(RR Ref) K6835
Special Wire Ties U3319
Ultragel II/OMAT: 655A K6835

(RR Ref)
V07 PAINTS, VARNISHES

AND THINNERS
V07-007 Two-Pack Epoxy Finish Base EC75R/802 White To repair K5635

White and Catalyst Catalyst ACT65R surface 85570
IP9064/000+IP9064 finish K3504
Cat./OMAT: 795 (RR Ref)
MIL-P-24441 K6835
OMAT: 795 (RR Ref)
V07-008 Red Oxide Deleted use V07-080

Touch-Up Primer
V07-011 E.E.L. Resistant CO. 5152 To repair K6835

Touch-Up Enamal OMAT: 709 (RR Ref) the surface

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 234
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
finish
PJP.1762.X.9520 K8818
V07-028 Chemical Conversion 383-430202 To repair

Coating Aluminum the surface
finish
Alodine 1200 51563

IAE85
LOCAL
Def Stan 03-18 K0851

MIL-CO5541 81349
OMAT: 175A (RR Ref)
V07-038 Air Drying Enamel IP 9138/OMat: 7/22B To repair K3504

(RR Ref) the surface
No. 428 Hi-Heat AI/OMAT: finish
7/22A (RR Ref)
PL82.C1 K5635
K6835
Touch-up AI Paint/OMAT:
7/22C (RR Ref)
V07-066 Thinner Deleted, use V07-139 To dilute

primer
V07-067 Primer Converter Deleted, use V07-140 To cure

primer
V07-076 Thinner Thinner TL-29 To dilute 51563

primer 98502
V07-077 Catalyst Catalyst x-304 To prepare 51563

base 98502
V07-078 Gloss Base Gloss Base 443-3 Base 51563

(Black) component 98502
V07-079 Bright Aluminium Aluminium 30P (Bright) To repair 85570

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 235
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base Ec 75R/C6615 surface K6835
Catalyst Act 65R K5635
IP9064+IP9064CAT/ K3504
OMAT: 7/144A (RR Ref)
JCR-266 (JAEC Ref)
OMAT: 7/144 Ref)
V07-080 Two-pack Epoxy Base component PR 143R To prepare K6835

Primer and Catalyst ACT 149R base 85570
Catalyst JCR-268 (JAEC Ref)
MIL-P-23377 K5635
OMAT: 766 (RR Ref)
V07-081 Epoxy Primer ACT213 Catalyst/ To prepare

Catalyst OMAT: 766E (RR Ref) base
Base 463-6-27/
OMAT: 766C (RR Ref)
BMS 10-11ty 1 QPL/
OMAT: 766D (RR Ref)
Catalyst ACT 149R 85570

K5635
K6835
Catalyst X-337/
OMAT: 766C (RR Ref)
IP 9064 CAT/OMAT: K3504

766A (RR Ref)
IP 9064/6362 Base/OMAT: K3504

766A (RR Ref)
IP 9064/6362/OMAT: K3504
766A (RR Ref)
JCR-269 (JAEC Ref)
MIL-P-23377F 81349
OMAT: 766 (RR Ref)
PR 213/ Base/OMAT:
766E (RR Ref)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 236
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V07-082 Thinner IP 9064 Thinners/ To dilute K3504
R OMAT: 793A (RR Ref) primer
R JCR-271 (JAEC Ref)
R OMAT: 793 (RR Ref)
R Thinner T17 85570

R K5635
R K6835
R V07-096 Thinner Thinner TL-59 To dilute 51563

R primer 98502
R V07-097 Catalyst Catalyst x-310A To prepare 51563

R base 98502
R V07-098 Clear Polyurethane Clear Polyurethane To repair 51563

R 683-3-2 surface 98502
R finish
R V07-117 Epoxy Matt 9110X9003 EC75R/801 To repair K5635

R Finish-Black MSRR9064 DTD555A surface K5635
R finish
R V07-118 Catalyst (For Gloss 2000-2-0538 ACT65R To prepare K5635

R Finish) MSRR9064 base K5635
R V07-119 Epoxy Gloss 9110X0000 EC75R/802 To repair K5635

R Finish-White MSRR9064 surface K5635
R finish
R V07-120 Catalyst (For Matt 2000-7-0290 ACT68R To prepare K5635

R Finish) MSRR9064 base
R V07-139 Catalyst EC117 To prepare 91342

R base
R V07-140 Epoxy Primer 10-P4-2 To prepare 91342

R base
R V08 BONDING ADHESIVES,

R FILLERS AND SEALERS
R V08-006 Filler, Two Pack EC 3524 B/A AF/OMAT: To fill 94960

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 237
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R 874B (RR Ref) joints K0993
R EC 3524 B/A PART A and 94960

R B/OMAT: 874 (RR Ref) K0993
R K6835
R LOCAL
R Injection and Spatula LOCAL

R Application
R MSSR 1001 (Injection and K6835

R Spatula Application)
R MSRR 1002/OMAT: 874B K0993

R (RR Ref)
R V08-013 Cold Curing Silicone AFS 1755/OMAT: 872A To seal K6835

R Compound (RR Ref) items
R AFS 1756/OMAT: 872D K6835

R (RR Ref)
R AMBERSIL 1008A/OMAT: K6835

R 872E
R MIL-A-46106B K6835
R MIL-A-46106B/OMAT: 872A K6835
R (RR Ref)
R OMAT: 872 (RR Ref) K6835

R RTV 106 (RED)/OMAT: 872A 01139
R (RR Ref) IAE146
R K6835
R RTV 159 (RED)/OMAT: 872D IAE146

R (RR Ref) K7823
R SILASTIC 732/OMAT: 872F K6835

R (RR Ref)
R SILICOSET 152 IAE242

R K3504
R K6835

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 238
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R K7652
R V08-014 Primer for Silicoset OMAT : 876A To prepare

R 151, 152, 153 surfaces
R for sealant
R SILICOSET PRIMER O.P.1 IAE200

R IAE242
R K3504
R K6835
R K7652
R SILICOSET PRIMER K6835

R O.P.2/OMAT: 876B
R (RR Ref)
R V08-021 Adhesive HYSOL E.A. 934NA To secure 33564

R (2-PACK) items
R MSRR 9328 (RR Ref) IAE200

R K6835
R OMAT: 8/154 (RR Ref) AS

R ALT
R OMAT: 8/52 (RR Ref)
R PART A GREY PASTE S3837

R PART B AMBER LIQUID U3167
R V08-024 Sealant PR-1422B1/2 To seal ONYS9

R items 51563
R V08-026 Locking Compound AFS 1737A To safety IAE259

R Loctite super fast 222 items 05972
R IAE200
R IAE261
R IAE379
R IAE380
R K3504
R K6835
R MIL-S-46163A TYPE 2 U0406

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 239
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R NSC 8030-99-224-8425
R V08-028 Adhesive, Two-Pack HYSOL EA 956, TWO-PART To secure 12405

R Epoxy items 33564
R 51563
R V08-029 Primer Base Deleted, use V07-140
R V08-030 Sealant, 2 Part Pack, DOW CORNING To seal 71984

R Base and Catalyst items
R DC 90-006 K6835
R OMAT: 8/138 (RR Ref) K6835
R V08-031 Silicon Rubber DOW CORNING To install 51563

R Compound RTV 732 seals 52096
R K6835
R K7750
R V08-032 Primer DC1200 (For To prepare 51563

R RTV Adhesive) surfaces for 71984
R adhesive K6835
R K7750
R JS-3025 (JAEC Ref)
R V08-033 Sealant DC 93-006-1 Two To seal 51563

R Part Pack items 71984
R K6835
R K7750
R V08-043 Cold Curing Silicone No longer required

R Compound
R V08-045 Silicone Rubber JS-3019 (JAEC Ref) To install 01139

R Compound RTV-103 (BLACK) seals
R V08-047 Hardener Araldite HY951 To process OLCV8

R resin IAE77
R K1007

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 240
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V08-048 Resin Araldite GY 6010/OMAT: To secure
R 803A (RR Ref) repair
R patches
R Araldite MY750 07566

R OLCV8
R IAE200
R IAE77
R K1007
R K3504
R V08-049 Fiberglass Cloth 0.003in. (0.076mm) For the

R MSRR 9049 (RR Ref) manufacture
R OMAT: 887 (RR Ref) of repair
R patches
R tyglass Y314/205-T5 K2096
R tyglass Y314/205-T5 K6835
R V08-050 Resin HYSOL EA 9390 PART A K4585

R and B U3167
R V08-069 Resin Adiprene LW520 48436

R IAE84
R K6835
R JCR-270 (JAEC Ref)

R MSRR 9212 (RR Ref)
R V08-074 Sealant PWA 36003 (P&W Ref) To install

R RTV 157 (GREY) seal
R RTV 159 (RED) 01139
R V08-077 Curing Agent Ethacure100 2B836

R IAE402

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 241
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V08-109 Resin ARALDITE AW134 To secure K1007
R repair IAE432
R patches
R V08-110 Hardener HY 994 To process K1007

R resin IAE432
R V08-114 Toughened Acrylic Permabond F241 and Bonding IAE145

R Adhesive + Initiator No.1 Initiator
R OMAT: 8/121 (RR Ref) IAE329

R K6835
R IAE423
R Quickbond 612 and K6835

R Quickbond 610 Activator
R V08-115 Sealant MIL-S-8802 To seal ONYS9

R PR-1422B-2 items ONYS9
R V08-125 Sealing Polysulphide PR-1422B-1/2 Bonding, F0229

R (SEMKIT CARTRIDGE) Adhesives,
R JCR-294 (JAEC Ref) Fillers and
R Omat: 8/136B (RR Ref) Sealers
R V08-141 Sealing Compound Polysulphide Proseal ONY59

R 870 B-1/2
R B2 OMat 8/107C ONY59
R V08-142 Polysulphide Compound PR-1440B-2 Bonding, 0NYS9

R Two part sealer Adhesives, K2096
R MIL-S-8802 Class B Fillers and
R Omat: 8/219 (RR Ref) sealers
R JCR-301, JCR 315
R (JAEC Ref)
R V08-146 Polysulphide PR-1436 G B2 To seal ONYS9

R Sealant OMAT: 8/107A (RR REF) items
R V10 OILS, FLUIDS AND

R LUBRICANTS

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 242
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V10-003 Colloidal Graphite DAG 580 To prevent 50833
R Dry Film Lubricant seizure 70079
R IAE258
R K0204
R K6835
R LOCAL
R V10-005 Colloidal Molybdenum MOLYDAG 709 To prevent 50833

R Disulphide in MOLYKOTE D321R seizure 70079
R Toluene IAE200
R IAE258
R K0204
R K6835
R LOCAL
R V10-014 Anti-Corrosion AMBERSIL 40+NB/ To preserve K7652

R Inhibiting Fluid OMAT: 1042E (RR Ref) components
R ARDROX PX24 23373

R 37127
R B1082
R F3082
R IAE206
R IAE243
R IAE244
R IAE245
R K0851
R K2884
R K6858
R K8095
R ONOL1
R DEFSTAN 68-10/2 K7652
R LPS.1 GREASELESS LUB./ K6835

R OMAT: 1042A (RR Ref)
R STEELGARD 521B/ IAE352

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 243
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V10-015 Temporary Rust DEF 2331 To preserve

R Preventive MIL-C-16173 Grade 2 items in
R NATO C-614 storage
R PX1 07950
R 36131
R IAE248
R IAE253
R IAE254
R IAE269
R K6835
R V10-020 Mineral Oil Deleted, Use To preserve

R Alternatives components
R V10-023 Mineral Oil Deleted, Use To preserve

R V10-103 components
R V10-031 Anti Galling 373-992591 (FIAT Ref) To prevent 08659

R Compound Fel Pro C-200 seizure 73165
R PWA 586 (P&W Ref)
R V10-032 Anti Galling FE PRO C-200 To prevent 73165

R Compound Kaylube No.3 seizure 15653
R PWA-586 (P&W Ref)
R V10-038 Petroleum Jelly DEF STAN 91.38 To lubricate K0007

R Grade PX-7 seal rings
R NATO CODE NS743
R SILKOLENE 77S
R (YELLOW-SOFT)
R VV-P-236 K6835
R V10-039 Deleted Use V10-077
R V10-040 Deleted Use V10-077

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 244
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V10-041 Petrolatum, White Petrolatum (T.G.) To lubricate 86459
R PMC9609 (P&W Ref) seal rings
R Vaseline 92469
R White Fonoline 78369
R White Protopet 1S 78369
R V10-045 Fluid Leak Tec Formula 372E To identify 03530

R PMC 9569 (P&W Ref) leaks
R V10-045A Fluid Snoop liquid Oils and 02570

R leak detector fluids IAE469
R PMC 2277 (P&W Ref)
R Omat 1015 (RR Ref)
R V10-051 Corrosion Preventive Mil-C-16173 Grade 1 To preserve 81349

R items in
R storage
R V10-055 Antigallant Deleted, Use V10-094 To prevent

R seizure
R V10-056 Grease AEROSHELL 8 To prevent 36131

R seizure IAE248
R IAE253
R IAE254
R K1315
R V10-058 Penetrating Oil Freeway 846/OMAT: 1001B To loosen IAE311

R (RR Ref) seized items K6835
R Lusol 1 K6835
R Plus Gas/OMAT: 1001A K3895

R (RR Ref) K6835
R V10-060 Liquid Paraffin BP Technical To lubricate LOCAL

R White Oil seal rings
R V10-066 Lubricating Oil STP Oil Treatment Grade To lubricate 58402

R ST-1014 seal rings

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 245
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V10-067 Lubricant MO-Lith No.2 To prevent 73219
R seizure
R V10-070 Anti Seize Compoud AFS 1925 To prevent IAE200

R seizure IAE377
R IAE389
R IAE392
R IAE393
R K0567
R K1070
R DTD 900/6128 (RR Ref)

R ROCOL 797 IAE391

R K0567
R V10-072 Anti Seize Compound DEFSTAN 80-81/OMAT: 417B To prevent K6835

R (Molybdenum (RR Ref) seizure
R Disulphide)
R DTD 500/5530 IAE200

R DTD 900/5530 K3504
R GP 109/OMAT: 417B K6835
R (RR Ref)
R NATO S722/OMAT: 417B K6835

R (RR Ref)
R OMAT: 417A (RR Ref)
R Silkolene 751 K007

R K3504
R V10-073 Synthetic Grease Aeroshell Grease 17 To prevent 07950

R Molybdenum Disulphide seizure 36131
R IAE248
R IAE253
R IAE254
R IAE256
R K3504
R K6835

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 246
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R Braycote 664/OMAT: 476A K0132
R (RR Ref)
R DEFSTAN 91-57 K0567

R MIL-G-21164
R MIL-G-21164D K0132
R NC G-353
R ROCOL Aerospec K0567

R 250/OMAT: 476B (RR Ref)
R V10-077 Approved Engine Oils See listing below IAE00
R V10-077A Approved Engine Oil Mobil Jet II To service 19135

R engine K1932
R V10-077B Approved Engine Oil Aeroshell Turbine Oil To service K1315

R 500 engine
R V10-077C Approved Engine Oil Aeroshell 560 To service K1315

R Aeroshell Turbine Oil engine 54527
R 560
R V10-077D Approved Engine Oil BP turbo oil 2380 To service 29700

R (formerly EXXON turbo engine K1274
R oil)
R V10-077E Approved Engine Oil Aeroshell 555 To service K1315

R Aeroshell Turbine Oil engine 54527
R 555
R V10-077F Approved Engine Oil Castrol 5000 To service 2H517

R engine 2R128
R 37995
R K0132
R K2967
R U0638
R V10-077G Approved Engine Oil Mobil Jet 254 To service 19135

R engine K1932

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 247
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V10-077H Approved Engine Oil BPTO 2197 To service 29700
R (formerly EXXON engine
R ETO)
R V10-077I Approved Engine Oil Turbo Nycoil 600 To service IAE436

R engine IAE437
R V10-077J Approved Engine Oil Mobil Jet 291 To service 19135

R engine K1932
R V10-078 Anti Seize Compound MIL-L25681 To prevent 81349

R PT 605 seizure 06341
R 51563
R V10-085 Anti Seize Compound Metal Ass Paste To prevent 51563

R (ROHR Ref) seizure
R Metal Ass Spray 71983

R (ROHR Ref)
R Molykote-G-N 71984
R MIL-L-25681
R PT 605
R V10-094 Anti Seize Compound Bostik Never-Seez Comp To prevent K6835

R (ROHR Ref) seizure
R MSRR9409
R NSN-165 IAE376
R NSN-16-A U2215
R OMAT: 4/23 (RR Ref) K1030
R V10-103 Mineral Oil Aeroshell Turbine 07950

R Oil No.2 IAE248
R IAE253
R IAE256
R MIL-L-6081 GRADE 1010

R NATO O-133
R ROYCO 481
R V10-106 Bonded Lubricant MOLYCOTE D321R To prevent 21752

R seizure 71984

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 248
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R IAE222
R IAE275
R IAE276
R IAE277
R IAE285
R K6835
R OMAT: 4/51 (RR Ref) K7750
R V10-108 Teflon Based Tri-flow IAE295

R Lubricant LOCAL
R V10-109 High Temperature PWA 36001 (P&W Ref) To prevent 02570

R Anti Seize Lubricant PWA 9940 (P&W Ref) seizure
R Silver Goop
R V10-121 Lubricating Fluid FC 43 To prevent 76381

R PWA 36511 (P+W REF) seizure
R V10-129 Anti Seize Paste TIODE T8E PASTE To prevent 34568

R PWA 36246 (P&W Ref) seizure
R V11 FUELS AND FUEL

R ADDITIVES
R V11-001 Civil Aviation Fuels and IAE00

R Kerosene fuel
R additives
R ASMT D1655 JET A LOCAL
R V11-002 Civil Aviation IAE00

R Kerosene - Low Freeze
R ASMT D1655 JET A-1 LOCAL
R V11-003 Wide-Cut Fuel ASMT D1655 JET B IAE00

R LOCAL
R V11-004 Fuel Additive Nuchem PCI-105 IAE00

R LOCAL
R V11-005 Fuel Additive Apollo PRI-19 IAE00

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 249
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R LOCAL
R V11-008 Anti-Corrosion IAE00

R Additive
R Du Pont AFA-1 LOCAL
R V11-009 Fuel Additive Du Pont DCI-4A IAE00

R LOCAL

R Additive
R Lubrizol 541 LOCAL

R Additive
R Nalco 5403 LOCAL

R Additive
R Nalco 5403 LOCAL

R Additive
R Petrolite Tolad 245 LOCAL
R V11-014 Anti-Corrosion Texaco TXA 182 IAE00

R Additive (TRI 182) LOCAL
R V11-015 Thermal Stability IAE00

R Additive
R Du Pont JFA-5 LOCAL
R V11-016 Anti-Icing IAE00

R Additive
R Philips PFA 55 MB LOCAL

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 250
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R V11-017 Anti-Icing IAE00
R Additive
R MIL-I-27686 LOCAL
R V11-018 Anti-Static IAE00

R Additive
R Shell ASA 3 LOCAL
R V11-019 Anti-Static IAE00

R Additive
R Du Pont Stardis 450 LOCAL
R V11-020 Lubricity Improver IAE00

R Additive
R Mobilad F-800 LOCAL
R V11-021 Biocide Additive Biobar JF IAE00

R LOCAL
R V11-022 Anti-Smoke IAE00

R Additive
R Ethyl CI-2 LOCAL

R Additive
R Nuchem TA-104 LOCAL

R Additive
R Apollo DGT-2 LOCAL
R V11-025 Icing and Corrosion AL.48 (AL41/Nalco 5403 K1315

R Inhibitor MIXT)
R British Spec. Ref K1315

R (Derd 2451)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 251
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
British Spec. Ref K1315
(Derd 2453)
British Spec. Ref K1315

(Derd 2461)
V11-030 Fuel Additive Sulfur Hexafluoride OGYW6

(SF6)
V12 PACKING
V12-004 PVC Sheet 55H 200 Natural To preserve U1592

131, 0.25mm (0.01in.) items in
storage
BS1763 Type 1A LOCAL

Fromocene K6835
OMAT: 1250 (RR Ref)
V12-013 VPI Impregnated Carrs No. 03181 To preserve IAE266

Paper VPI No.260 items in K6402
CLASS 1 STYLE A FORM B storage K6835
MIL-P-3420
OMAT: 1221 (RR Ref)
V12-045 Vacuum Bag RS200, RICHMOND INC. To seal 85670

Tape Sealant
V12-046 Vacuum Bag SM5170, SCHNEE- To seal 53309

Tape Sealant MOREHEAD INC.
Subtask 70-30-00-918-054
D. Suppliers Names and Addresses

SUPPLIER CODE A2549
Norton Societa
Per Azioni
4 Via Per Cesano
Boscone
20 094 Corsico, Milano
Italy
SUPPLIER CODE B1082
NV Brent - SA

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 252
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Aerospace Systems Group
Kaleweg 24-26
B9030 Mariakerke (Gent)
Belgium
SUPPLIER CODE C1308
Brent GMBH
Post Fach 300107
Rostoker Strasse
41199 Monchengladbach
Germany
SUPPLIER CODE F3082
Chemserve Systems Ltd
PO Box 12055
Chloorkop 1624
South Africa
SUPPLIER code IAE00
IAE International Aero Engines AG
Corporate Centre II
628 Hebron Ave
Glastonbury CT 06033-2595
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE05
J.B. Prata LTD
935 Phenix Ave
Cranston RI 02921
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE07
National Tape Corp
P.O. Box 23237
New Orleans LA70123
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE14
Fleet Supplies Inc.
Box 93981
Cleveland OH44101-5831
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE52
See Fed. Code 98502
SUPPLIER CODE IAE61
Rolls-Royce Inc.
1191 Freedom Drive
suite 600
Reston VA22090-5602
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE63
Modern Chemical Inc.
P.O. Box 368

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 253
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Jacksonville AR 72076
USA
SUPPLIER CODE IAE66
Marktek Corp
3-10, Sanno 2-Chome
Ota-Ku
Tokyo 143
Japan
SUPPLIER CODE IAE67
Empire Berol Corp
105 Westpark Drive
PO Box 2248
Brentwood, TN 37024-2248
SUPPLIER CODE IAE77
B and K Resins Ltd
Unit 2, Ashgrove Road
Bromley, BR1 4TH
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE IAE85
See Fed. code 70657
SUPPLIER CODE IAE108
Surechem Pty Ltd
PO Box 62
Toongabie
Blacktown NSW 2148
Australia
Lucas Avitron
Div of Lucas Aerospace
P.o. Box 120 039
Stamford CT 06912
USA
K&K Horgen Ltd
Suffolk House
George Street
Croydon, CRO 3QL
Great Britain
National Starch and Chemical Corp.
Permabond International
15850 W Bluemound Rd, Suite 30
Brookfield, WI 53005
USA
General Electrical Canada Inc.
Silicone Products Div.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 254
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

2300 Medowvale Blvd.
Mississauga
Ontario L5N 5P9
Canada
Industrial Paint Inc
66 Erna Avenue
Milford, CT 06460
USA
Brent Asia PTE Ltd
12 Loyang Crescent
Singapore 1750
Avery Dennison
Dennison Division
One Clarks Hill
Framingham MA 01701
USA
Fibreglass Ltd
Prescot Road
St Helens
Mersyside, WA10 3TR
Great Britain
Dow Corning Europe
154 Chausee De La Hulpe
1170 Brussels
Belgium
Carborundum Abrasives G.B. Ltd
Trafford Park
Manchester, M17 1NR
Great Britain
Stanchem Inc
2900 J-B Deschamps Blvd
Jachine
Quebec, H8T 1C8
Pyrene-Rai Metal Treatments Ltd
Nyrlon House
245B Dr. Annie Beasant Road
Worli
Bombay 400025
India

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 255
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Ardrox-Agena Quimica Ltda
Rua Camboriu 112
20.975-160 Rio De Janeiro
RJ Brazil
SUPPLIER CODE IAE245 - See FED Code IAE108
Shell Compagny of Australia Ltd
Shell House
Level 23, 1 Sprint Street
Melbourne, Victoria 3000
PO Box 872K
Australia
Shell Brazil SA
Avenida Rio Branco 109
Rio de Janeiro
Brazil
Shell South Africa
Shell House
9 Riebeek Street
8001 Capetown
South Africa
Shell Oils
Cobden House
Station Road
Cheadle Hulme
Stockport, SJ8 5AD
Great Britain
Noxal Compagny PTY Ltd
PO Box 85
Isando
Transvaal
South Africa
Loctite Quemica Ltd
Rua Pais De Silva 643
Sao Paulo
Brazil
Loctite (Pacific) Ltd
Room 310 Caroline Mansion
4 Yun Ping Road
Hongkong

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 256
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Sawley Packaging Co Ltd
Nottingham Road
Derby, DE2 6AS
Great Britain
West Brook Lanolin Co
Laisterdyke
Bradford, BD4 8AU
Great Britain
Dow Corning Australia Pty Ltd
4 Ray Raod
Epping 2121
N.S.W.
Australia
Dow Corning Do Brazil Ltd
Rua Francisco Tramontano
100-80 Andar
05586 - Sao Paulo
Brazil
Dow Corning
Kabushiki-Kaisha Chemicals Product Group
15-1 Nishishimbashi
1-Chome, Minato-Ku
Tokyo 105
Japan
Castrol Ltd
91 Walkeshwar Road
PO Box 16172
Bombay 400006
India
Castrol KK ( Japan)
Nakanossakaue
Sunbright Twin
46-1 Honcho
2-Chome, Nakano 164
Japan
Castrol (S.A.) Ltd
Princess of Wales Terrace
Parktown
Johannesburg

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 257
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

South Africa
Dow Corning Asia Ltd
Room 802-806 Glouster TR
The Landmark
11 Pedder Street
Hongkong
Lo Bue Enterprises
119 Durban Avenue
Hopatcong, NJ 07843
USA
Norton Schliefmittel GMBH
50387 Wesseling
Germany
Castrol North America Inc
2150 Rue Francis Hughes
Ville De Laval
Quebec, H75 1NZ
Safra Co Ltd
Xenel Building
PO Box 2824
Jeddah 21461
Saudi Arabia
Applied Chemicals
Applie House
Wilson Lane
Coventry, CV6 6JA
Great Britain
Kimberly-Clark GMBH
Florinster 18
56218 Mulheim-Klarlich
Germany
Kimberly-Clark Far East PTE Ltd
Pasir Panjang
PO Box 86
Singapore 9111
Singapore
Kimberly-Clark Corp World Headquarters
PO Box 619100

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 258
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Dallas, TX 75261-9100
USA
National Starch and Chemical (PTY) Ltd
Permabond Division
Locked Bag 17
14 Tullamarine
Victoria 3043
Australia
SUPPLIER CODE IAE346 - See FED Code 02570
Vapor-Tek Ltd
Fairclough Street
Great Lever
Bolton, BL3 2AF
Great Britain
Eishin Kagaku Co Ltd
1-2-13 Migashi-Sinbashi
Minato-Ku
Tokyo
Japan-105
Tesa Tape Inc
5825 Carnegie Blvd
Charlotte
NC 28209
USA
Bostik Inc
Boston Street
Middleton, MA 01949
USA
Fuchs Lubricants Co DEL
17050 Lathrop Avenue
Harvey, IL 60426-6035
USA
Loctite (Australia) PTY Ltd
3 Endeavor Road
P.O. Box 2629
Taren Point 2229
Australia
Loctite (SA) PTY Ltd
9 Yaron Avenue

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 259
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Lea Glen
Florida, TVL 1709
Republic of South Africa
Turco Products Via Elf Atochem S.E.A.
53 Tuas Crescent
Singapore 2263
Singapore
Turco Products Via Autochem China
Beijing Liason Office
Room 1410, China World
Peoples Republic of China
Turco Via Ajax Chemicals
Factory Street
Granville 2142
N.S.W.
Australia
Sheafer Pen Australia PTY
420 Mt. Dandenong Road
PO Box 293
Croydon 3136
Victoria
Australia
Silmid Ltd
Unit 29, Elmdon Trading Estate
Bickenhill Lane
Birmingham, B37 7HE
Great Britain
Rocol (Hongkong) Ltd
Unit 21-23, Floor No.1
Hung To Road
Kwun Tong
Kowloon
Hongkong
Moganite Do Brazil Industrial Limitada
Av Jorge Alfredo
Camasmie 350, Parque Industrial
Ramos De Freitas
06816-901 Embu
Sao Paulo
Brazil

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 260
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Castrol Brazil LTDA
Av, Eng, Luis Carlos
Berrini 1253
04571-907 Sao Paulo
Brazil
National Starch and Chemical Company
480 South Dean Street
Englewood, NJ 07631
USA
SUPPLIER CODE K0132
Burmah-Castrol (UK) Ltd
Burmah Castrol House
Piper Way
Swindon, SN3 1RE
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0136
W Canning & Co Ltd
Great Hampton Street
Birmingham B18 6AS
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0204
Acheson Colloids Co.
Cattewatter Road
Prince Rock
Plymouth PL4 OSP
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0519
Henkel Chemicals Ltd
Inorganic Products Division
Henkel House
Enfield, EN1 1TS
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0567
Rocol Ltd
Rocol House
Wakefield Road
Swillington
Leeds, LS26 8BS
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0680
Rolls-Royce plc Derby
Spares Provisioning Department
Derby DE2 8BJ
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K0993

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 261
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

3M (UK) Plc
28 Great Jackson Street
Manchester, M15 4PA
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K1007
Ciba Geigy Plastics
Ciba-Geigy UK
Epoxy Resins Business Ctr
Duxfora Camb CB2 4QD
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K1030
Metco Ltd
Gore Lane
Chobham
Woking, GU24 8RD
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K1274
Esso Petroleum Co. Ltd
Ermyn Way
Leatherhead, KT22 8UX
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K1315
Shell Oils
Delta House
Wavell Road
Wythenshaw
Manchester, M22 5SB
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K1932
Mobil Oil Co, Ltd
Mobil Court
3 Clemments Inn
London WC2A 2EB
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K2096
Courtaulds Aerospace
Advanced Materials Division
PO Box 1
Summit Littleburgh, OL15 9QH
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K2769
Abrasive Development Ltd
Norman House, High Street
Henley in Arden
Solihull
West Midlands B95 5AH
Great Britain

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 262
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

SUPPLIER CODE K2884 - See FED Code K6858
SUPPLIER CODE K2967
Castrol Industrial Ltd
Castrol House
Marylebone Road
London, NW1 5AA
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K3237
Marston Bentley Ltd
9 Naylor Street
Liverpool, L3 6DS
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K3312
Sellotape G.B Ltd
The Woodside
Dunstable, LU5 4TP
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K3504
Indestructable Paint Co Ltd
25 Pentos Drive
Spark Hill
Birmingham B11 3TA
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K3895
English Abrasives and Chemicals Ltd
Dorey Road
Stafford, ST16 1EA
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K4182
Kimberley - Clark Ltd
Larkfield
Maidstone Kent ME20 7PS
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K4585
Short Bros Ltd
Aircraft Division
Aircraft Road
Queens Island
Belfast, BT3 9DZ
N-Ireland
SUPPLIER CODE K5635
Courtaulds Aerospace
Darlington Road
Shildon Co.
Durham DL4 20P
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K5991

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 263
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Norton Abrasive
Welwyn Garden City, AL7 H2
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K6402
Carrs Papier Ltd
Shirley
Solihull, B90 4LJ
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K6413
Imperial Chemicals Industries
Industrial Solvents Dept.
PO BOX 19
Weston Point
Runcorn WA7 4LW
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K6835
Med-Lab Ltd
Copeland St
Derby DE1 2PU
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K6858
Brent International plc
Brent Europe Ltd
Ridgeway Iver, SLO 9JJ
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K7625
Trimite Ldt
Arudel Road Trading Estate
Uxbridge, UB8 2SD
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K7652
Ambersil Ltd
Wylds Road
Castlefield Industrial Estate
Bridgewater, TA6 4DD
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K7750
Dow Corning Ltd
Molykite Division
Avco House
Castle Street
Reading RG1 7DZ
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K7766
British Standards Institution
2 Park Street
London W1A 2BS

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 264
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K7799
See CAGE Code K8767
SUPPLIER CODE K7823
G.E. Silicones
Division of G.E. Plastics Ltd
Old Hall Road
Sale
Cheshire
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE K8095 - See FED Code K6858
SUPPLIER CODE K8818
International Paint Co Ltd
Industrial Paints Div
Minerva Works
North Woolwich Road
Silvertown
London E16 2AF
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE Local
Local Purchase
SUPPLIER CODE S3837
Aero Consultants Ltd AG
Grabenstr PO 336
Naenkon/Uster,CH-8606
Switzerland
SUPPLIER CODE U0406
Loctite (UK) Ltd
Watchmead
Welwyn Garden City AL7 1JB
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE U0638
Ely Chemical Co Ltd/Octagon Processing
Burmah House
Pipers Way
Swindon, SN3 1RE
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE U1185 - See FED Code K1324
SUPPLIER CODE U1490
Universal Grinding Wheel Co Ltd
Universal Wks Doxey Rd
Stafford ST16 1EA
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE U2215
Bostik Ltd
Ulverscroft Rd
Leicester LE4 6BW

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 265
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE U3167
Aero Consultants U.K. Ltd
Stonehill
Stuckely Meadows
Huntingdon, PE18 6ED
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE OA7F7
Frederick Gumm Chemical Co Inc.
538 Forest Street
Kearney NJ07032-3606
USA
SUPPLIER CODE OBYN5
Turco Products Inc
Sub of ELF Atochem North America
3300 Montreal Industrial Way
Tucker, GA 30084-5290
USA
SUPPLIER CODE OGYW6
Tracer Research Corporation
3855 N. Business Centre Drive
Tuscon, AZ 85705
USA
SUPPLIER CODE OLCV8
Robnor Resins Ltd
Hunts Rise
South Marston Park
Swindon, SN3 4TE
Great Britain
SUPPLIER CODE ONOL1 - See FED Code 23373
SUPPLIER CODE ONYS9
Courtaulds Aerospace Inc
5454 San Fernando Road
PO Box 1800
Glendale, CA 91203
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 01139
General Electric Co
260 Hudson River Road
Waterford NY 12188
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 02570
Swagelok Co
29500 Solon Road
Solon, OH 44139-3492
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 03530

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 266
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

American Gas and Chemical Co Ltd
220 Pegasus Avenue
Northvale NJ 07647-1904
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 05972
Loctite Corp
North American Group
1001 Trout Brook Crossing
Rocky Hill, CT 06067-3582
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 06565
Norton Co
Coated Abrasive and Tape Division
PO Box 808
Troy, NY 12181
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 06637
Exxon Co. USA
East of Billings
P.O. Box 1163
Billings MT 59103
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 07566
Ciba Geigy Corp
Resins and Polymers Division
281 Fields Lane
Brewster, NY 10509-5000
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 07950
Royal Lubricants Co Inc
PO Box 518
Merry Lane
East Hanover NJ 07936
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 08659
Brightboy Abrasives Inc
7754 Arjons Drive
San Diego, CA 92126-4391
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 12405
Dexter Aerospace
Electronic Material Div.
15051E Don Julian Rd
Industry CA 91749
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 15653
Kaynar

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 267
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Division of Kaynar Technologies Inc
800 S State College Blvd
PO Box 3001
Fullerton CA 92634
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 17534
Alconox Inc
215 Park Avenue South
New York
NY 10003-1603
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 19135
Mobil Oil Corp
Beaumont Refinery
Interstate 10
PO Box 3311
Beaumont TX 77704
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 2H517
Castrol Industries Inc
775 Lois Drive
PO Box 2809
Warminster, PA 189742827
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 2R128
Castrol North America
Special Products Division
1001 West 31st Street
Downers Grove, IL60515
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 21405
Sherwin Inc
5530 Borwick Avenue
South Gate, CA90280-7402
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 21752
Dow Corning Inc
6747 Campebello Road
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada
SUPPLIER CODE 23373
Brent International Ltd
16961 Knott Ave
La Mirada Ca 90638-6015
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 24853
Gallard Schlesinger Chemical Manufacturing Group

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 268
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

584 Mineola Ave
Carle Place
New York 11514-1731
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 29700
Exxon Co USA
PO Box 4803
Houston TX 77210-4803
USA
or
800 Bell Street
Houston TX77002
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 32988
Faber-Castell Corp
551 Spring Place Road
PO Box 330
Lewisburg TN 37091-3447
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 33564
Dextor Hysol Aerospace Inc
Division of the Dextor Group
2850 Willow Pass Road
PO Box 312
Pittsburg, CA 94565-0031
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 33591
Kimberly-Clark Corporation
Service and Industrial Sector
1400 Holcomb Bridge Road
Roswell, GA 30076
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 36131
Shell Canada Ltd
400 4th Avenue SW
Calgary, Alberta T2P 1H5
Canada
SUPPLIER CODE 37127
Brent Canada Ltd
363 Arvin Avenue
Stoney Creek
Ontario, L8E 2H8
Canada
SUPPLIER CODE 37676
Magnaflux Corporation
3624 West Lake Avenue
Glenview, IL60025

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 269
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

USA
SUPPLIER CODE 37995
Burmah-Castrol Canada Ltd
3660 Lakeshore Blvd W
Toronto
Ontario, M8W 1P2
Canada
SUPPLIER CODE 44197
Saint Goban/Norton Industrial Group
1 New Bond Street
PO Box 15008
Worcester MA 01615-0008
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 50833
Acheson Colloids Canada Ltd
Shaver Street
Brentford
Ontario, N3T 5PG
Canada
SUPPLIER CODE 51563
Rohr Inc
850 Laggon Drive
P.O. Box 878
Chula Vista, CA 99910-2098
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 52096
Rolls-Royce Inc
Dulles International Airport
P.O. Box 17414
Washington DC 20041
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 54527
Shell Oil Co
1 Shell Plaza
PO Box 2463
Houston TX77001
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 58401
US Welding Corp
3579 HWY 50 East
No. 104
Carson City, NV 89701-2826
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 58402
STP Corporation
5300 Broken Sound Blvd NW
PO Box 3070

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 270
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Boca Raton FL 33431-3509
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 70079
Acheson Colloids Co
Div of Acheson Industries Inc.
1600 Washington Avenue
PO Box 61147
Port Huron MI 48061-1747
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 70362
Dixon Ticonderoga Co
Sandusky Div.
1706 Hayes Avenue
PO Box 2258
Sandusky OH 44870-4732
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 70657
ICI Americas Inc
Films Div.
New Murphy Rd and Concord Pike
Wilmington DE 19897
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 71361
McGean-Rohco Inc
Cee-Bee and Rochco Div
9520 E. Cee-Bee Dr
Downey CA 90241-7000
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 71410
Parker and Amchem
Div. of Henkal Corp
32100 Stephenson HWY
Madison Hgts MI 48071
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 71983
The Dow Chemical Co
2020 Dow Center
Midland MI 48674
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 71984
Dow Corning Corp
2200 W. Salzburg Rd
P.O. Box 994
Midland MI 48686-0997
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 72190
Exxon Chemical Americas

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 271
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

A div. of Exxon Chemical Co
P.O. Box 3272
Houston TX 77001
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 72406
Filtrol Corp
3250E Washington Blvd
Los Angeles CA 90023-4222
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 73165
Fel-Pro Inc
7450 N McCormick Blvd
PO Box 1103
Skokie IL 60076
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 73219
FISKE Brothers Refining Co.
129 Lockwood Street
Newark, NJ 07105-4720
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 76381
3M Company
3M Center
St Paul MM 55144-1000
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 78369
Witco Chemical Corp
Sonneborn Chemical and Refining CO
277 Park Ave
New York NY 10017-6156
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 80769
Polyken Technologies
Division of the Kendall Co
15 Hampshire Street
Mansfield, MA 02048
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 81343
Society of Automotive Engineers
SAE Dept. 195
400 Commonwelth Dr
Warrendale PA 15096-0001
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 81348
Federal Specification promulgated by
General Services Administration
Washington DC

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 272
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

USA
SUPPLIER CODE 81349
Military Specifications promulgated by
Military Departments/Agencies under
Authority of Defence Standardization
Manual 41203-M
SUPPLIER CODE 82110
Sunbelt Lumber Sales
2701-D Gulf Breeze Parkway
P.O. Box 966
Gulf Breeze, FL 32561-4406
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 82784
Nashua Corp.
Industrial Tape Division
2600 7th Avenue
Watervliet, NY 12189-1999
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 85570
Courtaulds Aerospace Inc
1608 4th Street
Berkeley CA 94710
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 85670
Richmond Division of Dixico Inc
Colton and Opal Streets
PO Box 1129
Redlands, CA 92373
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 86459
Penreco
Div. of Pennzoil Co
R.D.2
PO Box 1
Karns City, PA 16041
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 86874
Sanford Corp
2740 Washington Blvd
Bellwood IL 60104-1940
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 89204
Washington Mills Electro Minerals Corp
PO Box 428
20 North Main Street
North Grafton MA 01536
USA

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 273
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

SUPPLIER CODE 92469
Chesebrough - Ponds Inc
33 Benedict Place
Greenwich CT 06830-5339
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 94960
3M Traffic Control Materials Division
3M Center
Building 255 55
ST Paul MN 55144-1000
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 97361
Unisource and Alco Standard Co
21 Dodge Avenue
North Haven, CT 06473
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 98502
Akzo Nobel Coatings
434 W. Meats Street
Orange CA 92661
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 98733
Met-L-Check
1639 Euclid Street
Santa Monica, CA 90404-3770
USA
SUPPLIER CODE 99742
Permacel
Div. of Nitto Denko America
US HWY 1
PO Box 671
New Brunswich NJ 08903
USA

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-30-00

Page 274
Feb 01/08
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

WIRE THREAD INSERTS - REPAIRS
_____________________________
TASK 70-35-08-300-010
Install and Repair Wire Thread Inserts
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

jointing compound (Ref. 70-30-00)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-23-05-230-010 Local Application of Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection

70-35-08-991-154 Fig. 801
70-35-08-991-158 Fig. 802
70-35-08-991-159 Fig. 803
70-35-08-991-160 Fig. 804
70-35-08-991-169 Fig. 805
70-35-08-991-170 Fig. 806
70-35-08-991-171 Fig. 807
70-35-08-991-172 Fig. 808
70-35-08-991-150 Fig. 809
70-35-08-991-151 Fig. 810
70-35-08-991-152 Fig. 811
70-35-08-991-155 Fig. 812
70-35-08-991-156 Fig. 813
70-35-08-991-157 Fig. 814
70-35-08-991-173 Fig. 815
70-35-08-991-174 Fig. 816
70-35-08-991-153 Fig. 817
70-35-08-991-161 Fig. 818
70-35-08-991-162 Fig. 819

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 801
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-35-08-991-163 Fig. 820

70-35-08-991-164 Fig. 821
70-35-08-991-165 Fig. 822
70-35-08-991-166 Fig. 823
70-35-08-991-167 Fig. 824
70-35-08-991-168 Fig. 825
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-35-08-869-051
A. General

_______
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-35-08-350-051
A. Remove the wire thread insert.

(Ref. Fig. 801/TASK 70-35-08-991-154, 802/TASK 70-35-08-991-158, 803/TASK
70-35-08-991-159, 804/TASK 70-35-08-991-160, 805/TASK 70-35-08-991-169,
806/TASK 70-35-08-991-170, 807/TASK 70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-
991-172)
(1) Remove the damaged insert:
(a) Use the extraction tool.
Subtask 70-35-08-320-050
B. Machine the hole.

70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 809/TASK 70-35-08-991-150,
810/TASK 70-35-08-991-151, 811/TASK 70-35-08-991-152)
(1) Drill the hole to permit installation of the insert (if not
previously installed).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 802
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Removal of the inserts

Figure 801/TASK 70-35-08-991-154

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 803
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Changes to tool make them fit wire thread inserts in assembled parts
Figure 802/TASK 70-35-08-991-158

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 804
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Changes to tool make them fit wire thread inserts in assembled parts
Figure 803/TASK 70-35-08-991-159

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 805
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Tool dimensions to fit wire thread inserts in assembled parts

Figure 804/TASK 70-35-08-991-160

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 806
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Approved hand tools

Figure 805/TASK 70-35-08-991-169

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 807
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Approved hand tools

Figure 806/TASK 70-35-08-991-170

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 808
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Approved hand tools

Figure 807/TASK 70-35-08-991-171

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 809
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Approved hand tools

Figure 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 810
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire thread insert dimension

Figure 809/TASK 70-35-08-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 811
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Threaded hole dimension for wire thread inserts

Figure 810/TASK 70-35-08-991-151

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 812
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Threaded hole dimension for wire thread inserts

Figure 811/TASK 70-35-08-991-152

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 813
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(2) Clean and examine the hole.
Subtask 70-35-08-380-050
C. Apply protection.
(1) Apply protection to the threads of magnesium components. Refer to the

applicable Manual Repair Scheme.
Subtask 70-35-08-350-052
D. Install the wire thread insert.

70-35-08-991-160, 805/TASK 70-35-08-991-169, 806/TASK 70-35-08-991-170,
807/TASK 70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 809/TASK 70-35-08-
991-150, 812/TASK 70-35-08-991-155, 813/TASK 70-35-08-991-156, 814/TASK
70-35-08-991-157, 815/TASK 70-35-08-991-173, 816/TASK 70-35-08-991-174)
(1) After selection of the applicable insert, apply a layer of jointing

compound (Material No. V04-004) to the threads, also apply a layer of
jointing compound (Material No. V04-004) to the threads of magnesium
components.
(2) Install the wire thread insert.
(a) Use the insertion tool.
(3) Remove the tang:
(a) Use the tang removal tool.
Subtask 70-35-08-230-050
E. Do a crack test on the repaired area.
(1) Do a crack on the repaired area (Ref. TASK 70-23-05-230-010).
Subtask 70-35-08-220-050
F. Do an inspection of the wire thread insert.

70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 809/TASK 70-35-08-991-150,
817/TASK 70-35-08-991-153, 818/TASK 70-35-08-991-161)
(1) Examine the wire thread insert.
(2) Do a check on the torque of the screw lock inserts.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 814
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Installation procedure
Figure 812/TASK 70-35-08-991-155

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 815
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Installation procedure
Figure 813/TASK 70-35-08-991-156

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 816
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Removal of the insert tang

Figure 814/TASK 70-35-08-991-157

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 817
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire thread inserts

Figure 815/TASK 70-35-08-991-173

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 818
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire thread inserts

Figure 816/TASK 70-35-08-991-174

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 819
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Dimensions of assembled inserts

Figure 817/TASK 70-35-08-991-153

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 820
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Torque check of screw lock inserts

Figure 818/TASK 70-35-08-991-161

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 821
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Subtask 70-35-08-220-051
G. Do an inspection on the repair insert for machining and installation.

70-35-08-991-164, 822/TASK 70-35-08-991-165, 823/TASK 70-35-08-991-166)
(1) Do a dimensional inspection on the component to make sure boss

proportions are sufficient for machining.
Subtask 70-35-08-320-051
H. Machine the hole.

70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 819/TASK 70-35-08-991-162,
820/TASK 70-35-08-991-163, 821/TASK 70-35-08-991-164, 822/TASK 70-35-08-
991-165, 823/TASK 70-35-08-991-166, 824/TASK 70-35-08-991-167, 825/TASK
70-35-08-991-168)
(1) Drill the hole for the repair insert.
(2) Tap the hole for the repair insert.
(3) Clean and examine the hole.
Subtask 70-35-08-380-051
J. Apply protection after machining the hole.
(1) Apply protection to the threads of magnesium components. Refer to the

applicable Manual Repair Scheme.
Subtask 70-35-08-350-053
K. Install the repair inserts.

70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 824/TASK 70-35-08-991-167,
825/TASK 70-35-08-991-168)

compound (Material No. V04-004) to threads, also apply a layer of
components.
(2) Install the repair insert.
(3) Do a visual inspection of the thread.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 822
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Dimensions for inserts in light alloy materials

Figure 819/TASK 70-35-08-991-162

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 823
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 820/TASK 70-35-08-991-163

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 824
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 821/TASK 70-35-08-991-164

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 825
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 822/TASK 70-35-08-991-165

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 826
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 823/TASK 70-35-08-991-166

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 827
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Repair inserts
Figure 824/TASK 70-35-08-991-167

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 828
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Repair inserts
Figure 825/TASK 70-35-08-991-168

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 829
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Subtask 70-35-08-350-054
L. Install the wire thread inserts.

70-35-08-991-160, 805/TASK 70-35-08-991-169, 806/TASK 70-35-08-991-170,
807/TASK 70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 809/TASK 70-35-08-
991-150, 812/TASK 70-35-08-991-155, 813/TASK 70-35-08-991-156, 815/TASK
70-35-08-991-173, 816/TASK 70-35-08-991-174)

compound (Material No. V04-004) to threads, also apply a layer of
components.
(2) Install the wire thread insert:
(a) Use the insertion tool.
(3) Remove the tang:
(a) Use the tang removal tool.
Subtask 70-35-08-230-051
M. Do a crack test on the repaired area (Ref. TASK 70-23-05-230-010)
Subtask 70-35-08-220-052
N. Do an inspection on the wire thread insert.

70-35-08-991-171, 808/TASK 70-35-08-991-172, 809/TASK 70-35-08-991-150,
817/TASK 70-35-08-991-153, 818/TASK 70-35-08-991-161)
(1) Examine the insert.
(2) Do a check on the torque of the screwlock inserts.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-08

Page 830
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

THINWALL SELF LOCK INSERTS - REPAIRS
____________________________________
TASK 70-35-26-300-010
Replace Damaged Thinwall Self Lock Inserts
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

jointing compound (Ref. 70-30-00)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-35-26-991-157 Fig. 801

70-35-26-991-151 Fig. 802
70-35-26-991-152 Fig. 803
70-35-26-991-150 Fig. 804
70-35-26-991-153 Fig. 805
70-35-26-991-154 Fig. 806
70-35-26-991-155 Fig. 807
70-35-26-991-156 Fig. 808

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 801
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-35-26-869-050
A. General

_______
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-35-26-350-050
A. Remove the Thinwall Insert

(Ref. Fig. 801/TASK 70-35-26-991-157)
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT DAMAGE THE THREADS OR SERRATIONS IN THE HOLE.
_______
(1) Remove the swaged lock device:
(a) Select the correct removal tool (Ref Table 6).
(b) Screw the tool into the insert.
(c) Stop when the bottom of the tool touches the bottom of the
counterbore.
(d) Remove the tool.
(2) Remove the insert:
(a) Select the correct drive tool.
(b) Turn the counterclockwise to remove the insert.
Subtask 70-35-26-220-050
B. Inspect the Hole
(1) Make sure there is no damage or unwanted material in the counterbore,

tapped hole and serrations.
(2) Use a thread gage to inspect the thread.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 802
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Thinwall insert removal

Figure 801/TASK 70-35-26-991-157

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 803
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Subtask 70-35-26-350-051
C. Install the Thinwall Insert

(Ref. Fig. 802/TASK 70-35-26-991-151, 803/TASK 70-35-26-991-152)
(1) Apply a layer of jointing compound (Material No. V04-004) to the

insert.
(a) Let the insert air dry for 10 minutes before installation.
(2) Select the correct installation tool (Ref Table 3).
(3) Turn the tool by hand, in a clockwise direction to install the

insert.
(4) Stop when the tool face touches the surface of the component.
(a) Make sure the insert is smooth with, or just below the bottom of
the chamfer.
Subtask 70-35-26-350-052
D. Swage the Thinwall Insert

70-35-26-991-154, 807/TASK 70-35-26-991-155)
(1) Align the serrations:
(a) If a serrated counterbore is used, you must make sure the

serrations are aligned.
(2) Lock the insert:
(a) Apply the minimum force necessary to the swage tool, until the
nylon stop washer on the tool touches the surface of the
component (Ref Table 4).
Subtask 70-35-26-220-051
E. Inspect the Thinwall Insert

(Ref. Fig. 808/TASK 70-35-26-991-156)
(1) Make sure the dimensions of the swaged insert agree with those
specified (Ref Table 5).
(2) Remove any loose flakes of material from the silver layer. Do not let
the flakes make contact with any mating surfaces of the component.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 804
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Installation tool data

Figure 802/TASK 70-35-26-991-151

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 805
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Installation depth
Figure 803/TASK 70-35-26-991-152

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 806
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Bolt thread diameter in relation to serration contour

Figure 804/TASK 70-35-26-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 807
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Aligned serrations
Figure 805/TASK 70-35-26-991-153

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 808
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Swage tool data

Figure 806/TASK 70-35-26-991-154

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 809
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Swaged thinwall insert and tool

Figure 807/TASK 70-35-26-991-155

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 810
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Specified dimensions
Figure 808/TASK 70-35-26-991-156

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 811
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Inspect the internal thread:
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT CLEAN THE INTERNAL THREAD OF THE INSERT WITH A
_______
TAP. IF YOU DO, DAMAGE TO THE INSERT WILL OCCUR.
(a) Select the correct thread gage or bolt.
(b) The thread gage or bolt must screw by hand easily into the
insert.
(c) Stop when the thread gage or bolt touches the lock thread.
(d) If the thread gage or bolt cannot be screwed by hand easily into
the insert, replace the thinwall insert again.
Table 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bolt thread | Short inserts| Lenght+/- |Long inserts| Lenght+/- | Tapped hole
diameter | | 0.25mm | | 0.30mm | diameter
| | (0.0098in.)| | (0.0118in.)|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.1900-32 | AS52760 | 7.37 | AS52790 | 1.07 | 0.2500-28
UNJF | | (0.290) | | (0.475) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.2500-28 | AS52761 | 9.65 | AS52791 | 15.11 | 0.3125-24
UNJF | | (0.380) | | (0.595) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.3125-24 | AS52762 | 11.94 | AS52792 | 18.29 | 0.3750-24
UNJF | | (0.470) | | (0.720) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.3750-24 | AS52763 | 14.22 | AS52793 | 22.22 | 0.4375-20
UNJF | | (0.560) | | (0.875) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.4375-20 | | | U760329 | 25.40 | 0.5000-20
UNJF | | | | (1.000) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.5000-20 | | | U760330 | 28.57 | 0.5625-24
UNJF | | | | (1.124) | UNJF
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 812
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Table 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bolt thread | Short inserts | AA mm | DIA AB | DIA AC | AD mm | ANGLE
diameter | | (in.) | mm | mm | (in.) | AE
| | | (in.) | (in.) | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.1900-32 | AS52760 | 0.305 | 6.77 | 6.57 | 0.08 | 80.3
UNJF | | (0.012) | (0.266) | ((0.258) | (0.003) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.2500-28 | AS52761 | 0.300 | 8.55 | 8.32 | 0.09 | 82.0
UNJF | | (0.118) | (0.337) | (0.327) | (0.0035)|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.3125-24 | AS52762 | 0.360 | 10.22 | 9.90 | 0.10 | 83.5
UNJF | | (0.014) | (0.402) | (0.389) | (0.0039)|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.3750-24 | AS52763 | 0.383 | 11.67 | 11.39 | 0.10 | 84.5
UNJF | | (0.015) | (0.459) | (0.448) | (0.0039)|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Short inserts | Long inserts | A mm (in.) +/-0.125 | B max mm (in.)
| | (0.0049) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52760 | AS52790 | 3.775 (0.147) | 4.52 (0.178)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52761 | AS52791 | 5.175 (0.204) | 5.77 (0.227)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52762 | AS52792 | 6.575 (0.259) | 6.76 (0.266)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52763 | AS52793 | 8.075 (0.318) | 8.41 (0.331)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760329 | 9.375 (0.369) | 8.94 (0.352)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760330 | 10.975 (0.432) | 10.67 (0.420)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 813
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Table 4
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Short | Long | DIA B mm (in.) | DIA C mm (in.) | DIA D mm (in.)
inserts | inserts | +/-0.015 (0.0006) | +/-0.127 (0.005) | +/-0.25 (0.0098)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52760 | AS52790 | 5.375 (0.212) | 1.829 (0.072) | 0.65 (0.025)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52761 | AS52791 | 7.125 (0.281) | 1.778 (0.070) | 0.80 (0.031)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52762 | AS52792 | 8.775 (0.345) | 1.702 (0.067) | 1.00 (0.039)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52763 | AS52793 | 10.375 (0.408) | 2.311 (0.091) | 1.10 (0.043)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760329 | 11.955 (0.471) | 2.413 (0.095) | 1.10 (0.043)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760330 | 13.625 (0.536) | 2.413 (0.095) | 1.10 (0.043)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Short | Long | DIA A mm (in.) | B depth min | After swage
inserts | inserts | | mm (in.) | check gage
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52760 | AS52790 | 5.36 (0.211) | 1.702 (0.067) | 726016
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52761 | AS52791 | 7.11 (0.279) | 1.651 (0.065) | 726588
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52762 | AS52792 | 8.76 (0.344) | 1.575 (0.062) | 726009
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52763 | AS52793 | 10.36 (0.407) | 2.185 (0.086) | 726592
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760329 | 11.94 (0.471) | 2.286 (0.09) | 726030
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760330 | 13.61 (0.535) | 2.286 (0.09) | 726033
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 814
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Table 6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Short | Long | Cutter | Major | Pitch |Diameter X| Y mm (in.)
inserts | inserts | threader | diameter| diameter|mm (in.) | Tolerance
| | diameter W | inches | inches | | +/- 0.3
| | (BS1580) | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52760 | AS52790 | 0.1870-32 | 0.1870 | 0.1667 | 6.37 | 8.00
| | UNS-3A | 0.1810 | 0.1644 | (0.25) | (0.315)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52761 | AS52791 | 0.2470-28 | 0.2470 | 0.2238 | 7.96 | 9.50
| | UNS-3A | 0.2405 | 0.2212 | (0.313) | (0.374)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52762 | AS52792 | 0.3095-24 | 0.3095 | 0.2824 | 9.53 | 12.50
| | UNS-3A | 0.3023 | 0.2796 | (0.375) | (0.492)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AS52763 | AS52793 | 0.3720-24 | 0.3720 | 0.3449 | 11.00 | 14.50
| | UNS-3A | 0.3648 | 0.3420 | (0.433) | (0.570)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760329 | 0.4345-20 | 0.4345 | 0.4020 | 12.73 | 16.00
| | UNS-3A | 0.4264 | 0.3989 | (0.501) | (0.629)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U760330 | 0.4970-20 | 0.4970 | 0.4645 | 14.25 | 18.50
| | UNS-3A | 0.4889 | 0.4613 | (0.561) | (0.728)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-35-26

Page 815
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

INSTALLATION OF LOCKING DEVICES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_______________________________________________________
TASK 70-40-11-911-014
Locking Devices General Information
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-40-11-911-010 Installation of the Tab-type Key Washers

70-40-11-911-011 Installation of Cupwashers
70-40-11-911-012 General Instructions for the Uses of Lockwire
R 70-40-11-911-016 General Instructions for Uses of Safety Cable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-40-11-869-050
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-40-11-911-054
A. General
R (1) The primary use of a locking device is to work against the force that
R causes two parts to become loose.It does not help to keep the
R necessary torque values. Because the effect of such a device is
directly related to safety,it must always be correctly applied.
(2) Locking devices are:
(a) Key washer (Ref. TASK 70-40-11-911-010)
(b) Cup washer (Ref. TASK 70-40-11-911-011)
(c) Lockwire (Ref. TASK 70-40-11-911-012)
R (d) Safety cable (Ref. TASK 70-40-11-911-016)

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 201
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-40-11-911-016
General Instructions for Uses of Safety Cable
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-40-11-991-157 Fig. 201

70-40-11-991-158 Fig. 202
70-40-11-991-159 Fig. 203
70-40-11-991-160 Fig. 204
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-40-11-941-050
WARNING : IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OPERATOR TO OBTAIN AND OBSERVE

_______
THE MANUFACTURERS MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR CONSUMABLE
CONTROL MEASURES AND ALSO TO TAKE LOCAL REGULATIONS INTO
CONSIDERATION.
Subtask 70-40-11-869-054
B. General
(1) Safety cable is now the preferred method for securing fittings.
70-42-08 Safety cable may be used whenever 70-42-08. Safety wire is
called out in the Engine manual.
(2) The instructions that follow are safety cable installation

instruction procedures for fasteners such as bolts, screws, tube
coupling nuts, hose connectors, electrical connectors.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________

70-40-11-991-159, 204/TASK 70-40-11-991-160)
Subtask 70-40-11-911-055
A. Safety Cable Installation
(1) Basic rules
NOTE : Where safety cable is specified on the assembly illustrations,

____
use the procedure that follows to install the cable.
(a) Maximum span
1
_ The maximum span of safety cable between two and points is 6.0
in. (152,4 mm), unless specified differently by the assembly
illustration.
(b) Installation defects
1
_ Nicks, kinks, fraying or any damage to the safety cable found
before, during or subsequent to installation at or between and
points is not permissible.
(c) Installation holes
CAUTION : DO NOT USE SAFETY CABLE IF THE HOLES ARE MORE THAN
_______
0.100IN. (2,54 MM) DIAMETER. THE FERRULES ON THE ENDS
OF THE CABLE ARE 0.106 TO 0.108IN. (2,693 TO 2,743 MM)
DIAMETER AND WILL FALL THROUGH HOLES LARGER THAN THIS.
1
_ Always install safety cable through the safety cable holes
given on the part.
(d) Permissible number of times to use the safety cable and ferrule :
1
_ The safety cable and its ferrule must be new for each
application. It is not permissible to use the safety cable and
ferrule again.
(e) Installation
1
_ Refer to
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-40-11-991-157)
and

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Examples of Safety Cable Methods

Figure 201/TASK 70-40-11-991-157

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Examples of Safety Cable Methods

Figure 202/TASK 70-40-11-991-158

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Safety Cabling Procedure

Figure 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 206
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Safety Cable Flex Limits

Figure 204/TASK 70-40-11-991-160

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 207
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(Ref. Fig. 202/TASK 70-40-11-991-158)
for ewamples of safety cable methods. Other methods are
possible.
2
_ No more than three fasteners is secured with one cable.
3
_ Install safety cable in two or three bolt patterns, unless
specified differently in the assembly procedure. The two bolt
pattern is preferred when you apply safety cable to an even
number of fasteners.
4
_ All possible combinations are not shown
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-40-11-991-157, 202/TASK 70-40-11-991-
158)
,but every combination must follow the basic rules for safety
cable.
(f) Pull-off load
1
_ The pull-off load is the force necessary to pull the cable out
of either the ferrule or the cable end fitting.
2
_ Each safety cable installation tool is checked for pull-off
load on a daily basis. This check can be extended up to a
maximum of one month, when the user has obtained sufficient
reliable experience on each tool.
(g) Crimp requirements (pull-off load)
1
_ Crimp the ferrule to the cable with one of the listed crimping
tools.
2 The safety cable must meet the minimum crimp requirements.

_
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Wire Diameter Inch (mm) | Minimum Pull-off Load Inch-Pounds (Nm)|
|--------------------------------|----------------------------------------|
| 0.020 (0.5) | 30 (3.39) |
|--------------------------------|----------------------------------------|
| 0.032 (0.8) | 70 (7.91) |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
(h) Cable size
1
_ The 0.8 mm (0.032 in.) diameter safety cable must be used for
all fittings. Onlywhen the 0.8 mm (0.032 in.) will not fit,
because the holes are smaller than thecable size, then the 0.5
mm (0.02 in.) safety cable is used.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 208
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(2) Installation
(a) Hole alignment
1
_ Do not decrease or increase the torque on the parts to
correctly align the holes for the cable.
(b) Adjacent units
1
_ Install safety cable so that any tendency for a fasteners to
loosen is counteracted by more tension on the cable.
2
_ It is recommended that there are no turns, more than 90 deg,
when the cable goes through the fasteners. The result in the
installation of safety cable with either a positive or
negative pull.
(c) Cable flex limits
1
_ Cable installation tools will give the specified flex limits.
The maximum ca ble flex limits between end points must be no
greater than
(Ref. Fig. 204/TASK 70-40-11-991-160)
when light finger pressure (approximately 2 pounds) is applied
at mid-span.
(d) Excess cable
1
_ After installation of safety cable, cut off the excess cable
from the crimped ferrule.
2
_ A maximum length of 0.031 in. (0.79 mm) is permissible to
extend past the crimped ferrule.
(e) Procedure
1
_ Check the units to make sure that they have been correctly
torqued. Under-torque or over-torque to obtain correct
alignment of the holes is not permitted. If it is not possible
to obtain correct alignment with the specified torque limit,
back off the unit and try again or select another unit.
2
_ In adjacent units, it is desirable that the holes be in
approximately the same relationship to each other.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 209
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3
_ Insert the end of the cable without the end fitting (ferrule)
through the hole in the first part and pull the cable through
unitil the end fitting is against the part. The safety cable
shall be kept as straight as possible whilst being installed
through parts.
4
_ Insert the end of the cable through the second part and pull
it through.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)
If there is a third part to be safety cabled, pass the cable
through this in the same manner.
5
_ Insert the free end of the cable through a ferrule in the
ferrule magazine. Pull the safety cable through the ferrule
and use the safety cable to pull out the ferrule from the
magazine.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)
6
_ Insert the free end of the cable through the crimping tool
making sure the large hole of the crimping head is on the same
side as the ferrule.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)
7
_ Move the crimping tool along the cable until the crimping head
is against the part. Ensure the ferrule is inside the hole in
the crimping head.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)
8
_ If the ferrule will not go into the crimping head, remove the
tool from the cable and then push the handles completely
together. When the handless are released they will open
automatically. Insert the cable back through the crimping head
and move the tool along the cable until the crimping head is
against the part. Ensure that the ferrule is inside the
crimping head.
9
_ Place the cable into the tensioning device on the crimping
tool and tension the cable.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)
CAUTION : DO NOT CRIMP THE FERRULE UNLESS THE CORRECT TENSION

_______
HAS BEEN APPLIED BY THE TENSIONING DEVICE.
10
__ Crimp the ferrule and cut the cable in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-40-11-991-159)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 210
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

11
__ Remove and discard the unused cable from the tensioning
device.
12
__ Push against the safety cable with a light finger pressure
half way between the components that have been wire locked. If
the cable feels loose, a dimensional check should be carried
out as follows to ensure that the cable is serviceable :
a
_ Measure the distance between the safety cable parts, write
this down as Dimension A. If three parts are safety cabled
together, measure the distance between each of the parts
(Dimensions D and E, and add the measurements together,
i.e. D + E = A.
b
_ Push against the safety cable with light finger pressure
half way between two safety cabled parts. Measure the
distance the safety cable moves laterally. Write this
dimension down as dimension C.
c
_ Compare the dimensions written down to the acceptable
limits.
(Ref. Fig. 204/TASK 70-40-11-991-160)
d
_ If the safety cable is not within the acceptable limits
given, cut and remove the installed cable then install a
new safety cable.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 211
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-40-11-911-010
Installation of the Tab-type Key Washers
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This task gives instructions on how to bend the keys and elliptical parts of
single-hole key washers ; also, key washers for use with more than one hole.
A straight key is one that is to be bent after the key washer is installed:
while a bent key is one that is bent when the key washer is made.
NOTE : Key washers must be used one time only. Use a new key washer for each
____
assembly.
Key washers must be installed with the straight keys set away from the axis
of the parts to be locked. The bent keys must always be set against the
mating surface or against the side of the hole to prevent movement of the
parts to be locked.
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

metal marking crayon (Ref. 70-30-00)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-40-11-991-151 Fig. 205

70-40-11-991-150 Fig. 206
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-40-11-869-051
A. Not Applicable

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 212
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-40-11-911-050
A. Installation of the Tab-type Key Washers
(1) Straight Keys
(a) All straight keys must be bent after the assembly procedure to
make sure that the key washers can not be used again. At least
one key must be bent to give the clearance shown at detail B ; At
least 75 percent of its width
(Ref. Fig. 205/TASK 70-40-11-991-151)
(as measured at the bottom of the key) must engage with the flat
side of the part to be locked. The remaining straight key or keys
can then be bent as
(Ref. Fig. 206/TASK 70-40-11-991-150)
necessary.
(2) Bent Keys
(a) The bent keys must be bent to give the clearance shown at detail
C.
(Ref. Fig. 206/TASK 70-40-11-991-150)
(3) Elliptical Key Washers
(a) When elliptical key washers are installed they must be bent
across a full flat of the part to be locked to give the clearance
shown at detail B
(Ref. Fig. 205/TASK 70-40-11-991-151, 206/TASK 70-40-11-991-150)
(4) Key Washers for use with more than one hole
(a) The data specified in paragraphs A and C must also be applied to

the keys for each hole when a key washer for use with more than
one hole is installed.
(5) Fuel Nozzle Nut Key Washers
(a) Apply only a pressure to bend the keys of the fuel nozzle nut key
washers ; they must not be hit to bend the keys.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 213
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Install the Key Washers

Figure 205/TASK 70-40-11-991-151

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 214
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Install the Tab-type Key Washers

Figure 206/TASK 70-40-11-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 215
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) Control the Position of the Key Washer
(a) Use a metal marking crayon (Material No. V02-081) to make marks
on the key washer and on its adjacent mating surface which does
not move. This will show if the key washer turns, when the nut is
tightened, which will cause damage to the internal keys.
(7) Basic Specification
(a) The key washers are correctly installed when this basic
specification is applied:
(b) a new key washer must always be used.
(c) the keys must always be bent as specified in this procedure.
(d) When the keys are bent the key washer must not shake and also,
the locked parts must not come loose.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 216
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-40-11-911-011
Installation of Cupwashers
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

metal marking crayon (Ref. 70-30-00)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-40-11-991-152 Fig. 207

70-40-11-991-154 Fig. 208
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-40-11-869-052
A. Not Applicable

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 217
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-40-11-911-051
A. Installation of Cupwashers
(1) Cup type keywashers must be used one time only. A new cup type
keywasher must be used at each assembly.
(2) The outside diameter (OD) of a cup type keywasher must be crimped
(dented).
(Ref. Fig. 207/TASK 70-40-11-991-152, 208/TASK 70-40-11-991-154)
The cup type keywasher must be crimped at two or more positions so
that it locks the nut or bolt in position. The inside diameter (ID)
of an internal cup type keywasher must also be crimped
(3) Crimping tools
(a) The surface of the tool that is used to cause the crimps (dents)
must be spherical in shape. The spherical radius must not be less
than 0.05 in. (1.27 mm)
(b) Squeeze action crimping tool
1
_ This type of tool is used to crimp (dent) the outside diameter
of cup type keywashers in to slots in the nut or bolt
(Ref. Fig. 207/TASK 70-40-11-991-152)
This type of tool is recommended and must be used when
possible.
(c) Drift type tool
1
_ A drift tool is a ring which is moved in an axial direction on
the cup type keywasher to crimp (dent) the outside diameter
(d) Punch
CAUTION : CUP TYPE KEYWASHERS USED WITH FUEL NOZZLE NUTS MUST NOT
_______
BE CRIMPED (DENTED) BY THIS PROCEDURE.
1
_ This type of tool is put in the correct position on the
outside diameter of the cup type keywasher and then hit with a
hammer.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 218
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

R

70-40-11

Page 219
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

Crimping Cup Type Keywashers


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 220
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Crimping Cup Type Keywashers


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 221
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Crimping Cup Type Keywashers with One Tab

Figure 208/TASK 70-40-11-991-154

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 222
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(4) Number of dents necessary
(a) A nut or bolt must be locked in position by the cup type

keywasher with the correct number of dents, after it is correctly
engaged and tightened.
(Ref. Fig. 207/TASK 70-40-11-991-152)
If the number of slots in the nut or bolt is less than the
necessary number of dents then the cup type keywasher must be
crimped at each possible position.
(b) A cup type keywasher which has one tab only, must be crimped as
shown
(Ref. Fig. 208/TASK 70-40-11-991-154)
(5) Position control
(a) Movement of the cup type keywasher during the procedure to torque
tighten can break the internal tabs. Make a mark on the cupwasher
and adjacent surface with a metal marking crayon (Material No.
V02-081) . A change in the position of the cup type keywasher can
then be seen during the procedure to torque tighten.
(6) A cup type keywasher is correctly installed when:
CAUTION : CUP TYPE KEYWASHERS THAT ARE LOOSE ARE NOT SATISFACTORY.
_______
(a) A new cup type keywasher is installed.
(b) Dents are made as shown. A correctly installed cup type keywasher
will
(Ref. Fig. 207/TASK 70-40-11-991-152, 208/TASK 70-40-11-991-154)
usually be tight. If the nut does not touch the diaphragm area of
the washer, the washer can be moved through the limits of the tab
clearance.
(c) The dents in the cup type keywasher are approximately the same
shape and size, and not broken, cracked or torn.
(d) The dents are made in to the slots in the nut or bolt, if slots
are available.
(e) The cup type keywasher has not moved during assembly.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 223
Feb 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

TASK 70-40-11-911-012
General Instructions for the Uses of Lockwire
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
These instructions give the recommended procedure to safety different items

in important areas.
The procedures only apply to those devices with a primary function to lock,
but does not include devices which have lock properties as part of the items
to be locked.
The procedures only apply to the types of lock devices specified in the
sections that follow:
Lockwire - (Lockwire used to safety items).
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-40-11-991-155 Fig. 209

70-40-11-991-156 Fig. 210
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-40-11-869-053
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-40-11-911-052
A. Instructions for the Uses of Lockwire.
(1) Lockwire is used to safety two or more items together. It must always
be installed so that if the locked item tries to become loose, more
tension will be applied to the lockwire.
NOTE : For temperatures of up to 1200 deg.F (648.9 deg.C) , use a

____
lockwire material of corrosion-resistant steel, such as
AMS5689. For temperatures of up to 1800 deg.F (982.2 deg.C)
use a lockwire material of heat and corrosion-resistant alloy,

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 224
Feb 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

such as AMS5687. Where AMS or other material specifications
are used, the diameter tolerances must be obeyed.
(Ref. Fig. 209/TASK 70-40-11-991-155)

Do not use those given in the material specification.
(2) The usual procedure to install lockwire is to use a double length of

wire, twisted together (Which is the double-twist procedure). Each
twist is made when the wires are twisted through 180 degrees to make
half a complete turn. A single-wire procedure can also be used when
specified, where the items are close together and make a regular
shape (That is a circle, rectangle, square or triangle). This
procedure is also used for electrical system items and in locations
where the single-wire procedure is recommended. At such times the
single-wire procedure must only be used for items in regular shapes
or for groups or parts that are almost the same.
(3) The maximum lockwire span between tension points is 6 in. (152.4 mm)
unless specified differently.
(4) The maximum number of items that can be safetied together (By the
double-twist or single-wire procedures), are those that can be locked
by a 24 in. (0.6 m) length of lockwire.
(5) The lockwire must always be pulled tight when it is twisted. The
number of twists to 1 in. (25.4 mm) is only a general guide.
(Ref. Fig. 209/TASK 70-40-11-991-155)
(6) Always be careful when you twist the lockwire, to make sure that it
is tight but not stressed too much. Light damage caused by the
approved type of lockwire pliers can be accepted. Lockwire that is
damaged because of incorrect tools or procedures can not be accepted.
The surfaces of approved lockwire pliers, which hold the wire, must
have rounded edges to prevent damage to the lockwire.
(7) The lockwire must be installed so that it can not become chafed,
damaged by vibration or have too much tension applied. The tension
must not be more than that which is necessary to keep the lockwire
tight.
(8) The lockwire must always be attached to the holes supplied. Where
there are no lockwire holes, the wire must be attached to an adjacent
part; but always make sure that the part can operate correctly
(Examples 13, 18 and 19).
(9) Always use new lockwire to safety the items.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 225
Feb 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Lockwire and Lockwire Hole Data

Figure 209/TASK 70-40-11-991-155

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 226
Feb 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

(10) Hose and electrical coupling nuts must always be safetied the same as
tube coupling nuts.
(11) Types of lockwire safety.

(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
(Examples 1 to 28). Although not all of the possible types are shown,
other procedures that are used must agree with these general
instructions.
Subtask 70-40-11-911-053
B. Detail Instructions to Install Lockwire.
(1) Examine the items to be safetied, to make sure that they are
correctly torqued. The specified torque limits must not be increased
or decreased to align the lockwire holes. If it is not possible to
align the holes with the correct torque applied, loosen the item and
try again or use a different item.
(2) With adjacent items, the lockwire holes must point in approximately
the same direction
(Ref. Fig. 209/TASK 70-40-11-991-155)
(examples 1 to 4) for clockwise threads. Also, the lockwire must be
installed so that the wire will try to pull the item in a clockwise
direction. This procedure will be different for counterclockwise
threads.
(3) Put the lockwire through the hole in the first item, then bend the
wire around the head of that item. The direction in which the
lockwire winds and twists, must be with the loop bent around the item
so that the twisted wire can not move up to make a loose loop
(Example 1).
(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
(4) Hold the lockwires tight and twist until the twisted part almost
touches the lockwire hole in the adjacent item. The twisted part must
always be less than 0.125 in. (3.17 mm) from the lockwire holes in
each item.
(5) Put the top wire through the lockwire hole in the second item, then
bend the wire around the head of that item. The direction in which
the lockwire winds and twists, must be with the loop bent around the
item so that the twisted wire can not move up to make a loose loop,
(Example 1 centre item).
(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
If more than two items are to be safetied together, do this procedure
again.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 227
Feb 01/07
R
IAC

I A E

V2500

Examples of Items Safetied with Lockwire


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 228
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500



R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 229
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500



R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 230
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) When the last item is safetied, continue to twist the lockwire to
make an end-piece. Use a minimum of four twists, to make sure that
the end-piece can not become loose. Bend the end-piece to make sure
that it can not become caught, then cut off all the unwanted
lockwire. Always discard the unwanted lockwire, so that it can not
cause damage.
NOTE : Short end-pieces are recommended, because of vibration.

____
(7) As an alternative to the bent around lockwire (Example 1),

(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
the lockwire can go across the item (Example 12). For castellated
nuts or taper head bolts, the lockwire can be bent across the item
(Examples 5, 6 and 7).
(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
Lockwire bent across the top of a bolt head (Example 3)
(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-40-11-991-156)
can also be accepted as an alternative to that bent around the bolt
head.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-40-11

Page 231
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

REPAIR OF SURFACES AFFECTED BY MINOR DAMAGE - REPAIRS
_____________________________________________________
TASK 70-42-11-300-010
Hand Polish and Blend Procedure
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
Self Explanatory
2. ______________________
Not Applicable
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-42-11-869-050
A. General.

_______
(1) This Standard Practice must only be applied when given in the related
Inspection/Check TASK.
(2) Parts repaired to this Standard Practice must be repaired as near to

their initial shape and surface condition as possible. The parts must
not be more than the worn dimension limits given in the related
Inspection/Check TASK.
(3) Standard workshop equipment is necessary for this procedure. Special

tools are not necessary.
(4) For the material of components refer to the Illustrated Parts

Catalogue.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-42-11

Page 801
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-42-11-220-050
A. Examine the Part to find the Level of Repair Necessary.
(1) Examine the part to get the length and the depth of damage:
(a) Refer to the related Inspection/Check TASK
Subtask 70-42-11-350-050
B. Repair the Damage.
CAUTION : ON TITANIUM COMPONENTS, ONLY SILICON CARBIDE TYPE WHEELS,

_______
STONES AND ABRASIVE PAPERS ARE TO BE USED FOR THIS REPAIR.
ALUMINIUM OXIDE TYPES MUST NOT BE USED.
CAUTION : IF YOU USE MECHANICAL CUTTERS, MAKE ONLY SMALL CUTS TO PREVENT
_______
TOO MUCH HEAT.
(1) Repair scores, galling, burrs, pick-up and fretting.
(a) Tools and operation necessary.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ stone or light hand polish
(b) Carefully remove high points, burrs and pick-up together with
pick-up on threats.
(c) Remove material to a maximum depth of 50 percent more than the

depth of the score.
(d) Use abrasive paper which is applicable to the material and the
surface finish necessary. Hand polish the repaired area to get
the necessary surface finish.
(2) Repair of pitting, strip and rub marks.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ stone or light hand polish

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-42-11

Page 802
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Stone or light hand polish to remove pitting.
(3) Repair distortion and dents.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ planish, make smooth or hand polish
(b) Remove distortion and dents.
(4) Repair of nicks
1
_ hand tools
2
_ hand polish to a smooth shape
(b) Scallop, make smooth and/or hand polish to remove nicks.
(c) Remove material to a minimum depth of 0.003 in. (0.08mm) below

surface of the nick.
(d) Use abrasive paper which is applicable to the material and

surface finish necessary. Hand polish the repaired area to get
the necessary surface finish.
(5) Repair of burned areas.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ dress, make smooth and polish
(b) For the standards, refer to the related Inspection/Check TASK.
(6) Repair of cracks.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ make smooth, scallop and hand polish the damaged area.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-42-11

Page 803
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Make smooth, scallop and hand polish to the standards related in
the Inspection/Check TASK.
(7) Repair of battering.
1
_ hand tools
2
_ make smooth the surface contour and hand polish.
(b) Make smooth the edges the battering marks.
(c) Scallop battering on leading or trailing edges. The scallop must

be a 5 to 1 length/depth minimum ratio, then hand polish. Refer
to the related Inspection/Check TASK.
Subtask 70-42-11-210-050
C. Examine the Repair Area.
(1) Examine and do a crack test.
(a) Refer to the related Inspection/Check TASK for the component

repaired. This will give the procedure and instructions for the
inspection and the crack test.
Subtask 70-42-11-350-051
D. Apply Surface Protection to the Repaired Area.
(1) Apply the surface protection as given in the applicable Manual

Repair.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-42-11

Page 804
Feb 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

DEFINITION OF DAMAGES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
_____________________________________________
TASK 70-52-11-918-010
Specified Types of Damage
1. __________________
Reason for the Job
This TASK gives names to specified types of damage. This is to prevent

errors which can occur when different names are used for the same type of
damage. Always use the correct name for the specified type of damage or
condition when an inspection is made on a component.
2. ______________________
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-52-11-991-150 Fig. 201

70-52-11-991-151 Fig. 202
70-52-11-991-152 Fig. 203
70-52-11-991-153 Fig. 204
70-52-11-991-154 Fig. 205
70-52-11-991-155 Fig. 206
70-52-11-991-156 Fig. 207
70-52-11-991-157 Fig. 208
70-52-11-991-158 Fig. 209
70-52-11-991-159 Fig. 210
70-52-11-991-160 Fig. 211
70-52-11-991-161 Fig. 212
70-52-11-991-162 Fig. 213
70-52-11-991-163 Fig. 214
70-52-11-991-164 Fig. 215
70-52-11-991-165 Fig. 216
70-52-11-991-166 Fig. 217
70-52-11-991-167 Fig. 218
70-52-11-991-168 Fig. 219
70-52-11-991-169 Fig. 220
70-52-11-991-170 Fig. 221
70-52-11-991-171 Fig. 222
70-52-11-991-172 Fig. 223
70-52-11-991-173 Fig. 224
70-52-11-991-174 Fig. 225
70-52-11-991-175 Fig. 226

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 201
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70-52-11-991-176 Fig. 227

70-52-11-991-177 Fig. 228
70-52-11-991-178 Fig. 229
70-52-11-991-179 Fig. 230
70-52-11-991-180 Fig. 231
70-52-11-991-181 Fig. 232
70-52-11-991-182 Fig. 233
70-52-11-991-183 Fig. 234
70-52-11-991-184 Fig. 235
70-52-11-991-185 Fig. 236
70-52-11-991-186 Fig. 237
70-52-11-991-188 Fig. 238
70-52-11-991-187 Fig. 239
70-52-11-991-189 Fig. 240
70-52-11-991-190 Fig. 241
70-52-11-991-191 Fig. 242
70-52-11-991-192 Fig. 243
3. __________
Job Set-up
Subtask 70-52-11-869-050
A. Not Applicable
4. Procedure
_________
Subtask 70-52-11-918-050
A. The Type of Damage to Metal Parts
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE OF DAMAGE RELATED DATA RELATED CONDITION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arced Flashed-over. The effects that can be seen (burned or

fused metal) of an unwanted electrical
discharge between two electrical
connections.
Battered Damaged by Is damage caused to a part when it is

impacts. constantly hit.
(Ref. Fig. 201/TASK 70-52-11-991-150)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 202
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Battered
Figure 201/TASK 70-52-11-991-150

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 203
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bent Creased, folded, Is angular change from the initial shape
kinked, leaning. or contour usually the cause is a lateral
force.
(Ref. Fig. 202/TASK 70-52-11-991-151)
Binding Sticking, tight. Is decreased movement such as a tightened

condition which results from very cold
temperatures or an unwanted particle
between surfaces.
Bowed - A curve which changes the surfaces usual

shape or contour. Usually the cause is
heat or a lateral force.
(Ref. Fig. 203/TASK 70-52-11-991-152)
Brinelled - Circular surface damage on bearing races.

Usually the cause is constant shock loads
given to the bearing.
(Ref. Fig. 204/TASK 70-52-11-991-153)
False Brinelling
Roller bearins: It is seen as axial lines
across the roller track which are
surfaces blemishes. This is permitted.
Ball bearings: Are two marks related to
each ball that can be seen on the ball
track which are surface blemishes. This
is permitted.
Brittle Perished Is a change in the elasticity of the

material.
Broken Fractured The separation of a part by force, into

two or more pieces.
(Ref. Fig. 205/TASK 70-52-11-991-154)
Bulged Balloned, swollen Internal and external local distortion.

Usually the cause is too much heat or
differences in pressure.
(Ref. Fig. 206/TASK 70-52-11-991-155)
Burned Charred A complete structural failure of the

material because of very hot
temperatures.
(Ref. Fig. 207/TASK 70-52-11-991-156)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 204
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Bent
Figure 202/TASK 70-52-11-991-151

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 205
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Bowed
Figure 203/TASK 70-52-11-991-152

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 206
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Brinelled
Figure 204/TASK 70-52-11-991-153

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 207
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Broken
Figure 205/TASK 70-52-11-991-154

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 208
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Bulge
Figure 206/TASK 70-52-11-991-155

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 209
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Burned
Figure 207/TASK 70-52-11-991-156

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 210
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Burrs - Rough edges or sharp projections on the
surface of a material.
Carboned Carbon covered, A quantity of carbon particles collected

carbon tracked, on the surface of a material.
(Ref. Fig. 208/TASK 70-52-11-991-157)
coked
Chafed Scraped, scuffed Friction wear damage, usually the cause

is two parts that rub together with a
small amount of movement.
Checkered Crazed Surface cracks; usually the cause is

heat.
Chipped - Material broken off the edge, corner or

surface. Usually caused when a material
is hit.
Collapsed Crushed The surface is pulled below its initial

contour. Usually the cause is large
differences in pressure.
(Ref. Fig. 209/TASK 70-52-11-991-158)
Corroded Rusted, oxidation, Slow deterioration of the material

etched, because of a chemical effect. Usually
sulphidation seen as oxide particles on the surface.
Cracked - A linear opening that can easily be seen

and which can cause the material to break
(Special fluorescent or magnetic
penetrants are not necessary).
(Ref. Fig. 210/TASK 70-52-11-991-159)
Crossed - Material damage to a part, for example,

crossed thread. Alternatively a part
incorrectly assembled, for example,
crossed wires.
Curled - A rounded fold in the material such as a

blade tip that has rubbed against the
engine casing.
(Ref. Fig. 211/TASK 70-52-11-991-160)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 211
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Carboned
Figure 208/TASK 70-52-11-991-157

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 212
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Collapsed
Figure 209/TASK 70-52-11-991-158

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 213
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Crack
Figure 210/TASK 70-52-11-991-159

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 214
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Curled
Figure 211/TASK 70-52-11-991-160

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 215
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dented - Damage to the surface of a part when it
is hit with an object. The material is
distorted but not removed.
(Ref. Fig. 212/TASK 70-52-11-991-161)
Deposits Metalized Particles of material collected on a part

from a different part or material.
(Ref. Fig. 213/TASK 70-52-11-991-162)
Disengaged Separated, loose This occurs only to parts that are

usually permanently attached to each
other.
Disintegrated Shattered Completely broken in pieces.

(Ref. Fig. 214/TASK 70-52-11-991-163)
Distorted Buckled, depressed Is damage that changes the initial shape

twisted, warped or contour of a material. Usually caused
when the material is hit, made hot or has
structural stresses applied.
(Ref. Fig. 215/TASK 70-52-11-991-164)
Eccentric Non-concentric Occurs when a part has the point about

which it turns moved off center.
Eroded - The flow of fluids or gases cause the

material to wear: heat or grit makes this
occur more quickly.
Extruded - Plastic deformation because of high

pressure between parts.
Feathered edge - The edge of the material is made thinner.
Flattened out - Permanent damage more than the tolerance

limits. Usually caused when the material
is compressed.
Frayed - Worn (rubbed) in to strips.
Fretted Galled, spiked Damage caused when two materials are

rubbed together at high pressure.
(Ref. Fig. 216/TASK 70-52-11-991-165)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 216
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Dent
Figure 212/TASK 70-52-11-991-161

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 217
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Deposits
Figure 213/TASK 70-52-11-991-162

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 218
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Disintigrated
Figure 214/TASK 70-52-11-991-163

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 219
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Distorted
Figure 215/TASK 70-52-11-991-164

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 220
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Galled
Figure 216/TASK 70-52-11-991-165

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 221
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fused - When two materials become attached to
each other, usually the cause is heat,
friction or current flow.
Galled Fretted, spiked Damage caused when two materials are

rubbed together at high pressure.
(Ref. Fig. 216/TASK 70-52-11-991-165)
Glazed - This is seen as a hard glossy surface

because of heat, varnish, incorrect loads
or when the surface is rubbed.
Gouge - A large rough cut of large depth with the

removal of some material, caused because
a sharp object has hit the part.
(Ref. Fig. 217/TASK 70-52-11-991-166)
Grooved Furrowed, fluted A smooth rounded score, because of wear,

with rounded corners and smooth on the
groove bottom.
Indications - Small cracks or other small defects that

can not be seen without fluorescent or
magnetic penetrants.
Melted - Distrotion to the initial shape or

contour because of heat friction or
pressure.
Nicked - A small cut on the surface or edge of a

part caused when the part is hit with an
object.
(Ref. Fig. 218/TASK 70-52-11-991-167)
Overheated Heat discolored, The part has become too hot, usually seen
heated as a change in color or condition.
(Ref. Fig. 219/TASK 70-52-11-991-168)
excessively, hot
spot
Part missing Lost Related only to a detail that is usually

permanently attached.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 222
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Gouge
Figure 217/TASK 70-52-11-991-166

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 223
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Nick
Figure 218/TASK 70-52-11-991-167

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 224
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Overheated
Figure 219/TASK 70-52-11-991-168

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 225
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peeled BListered, flaked, Is when the surface finish (coating,
exfoliated plating) breaks away.
(Ref. Fig. 220/TASK 70-52-11-991-169)
Peened - A group of very small dents caused when

the part is hit many times.
Pick-up - The material from one surface becomes

attached to a different surface. Ususally
caused when two surfaces are rubbed
together without sufficient lubricant.
(Ref. Fig. 221/TASK 70-52-11-991-170)
Pierced Hole in the part The part has a hole made in it.
Pitted - Small irregular shaped holes in the

surface of a material. Usually caused
because of corrosion or electrical
discharge.
(Ref. Fig. 222/TASK 70-52-11-991-171)
Plugged Clogged, The flow is decreased or prevented

obstructed, because of blockage.
restricted passage
Porous Pock-marked, Small empty spaces in the material

perforated weld usually found in welds and materials that
are cast.
(Ref. Fig. 223/TASK 70-52-11-991-172)
Rolled over Lipped, turned The edges of the part become rounded.
(Ref. Fig. 224/TASK 70-52-11-991-173)
metal
Rough - When the operation (not the surface) is

not smooth.
Rubbed Abraded To move with pressure or friction against

a different surface. Such as compressor
rub.
Ruptured Blown, burst, The surface of the part is broken open

split because of an internal stress or force.
(Ref. Fig. 225/TASK 70-52-11-991-174)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 226
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Peeled
Figure 220/TASK 70-52-11-991-169

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 227
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Pick-up
Figure 221/TASK 70-52-11-991-170

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 228
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Pitted
Figure 222/TASK 70-52-11-991-171

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 229
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Porous
Figure 223/TASK 70-52-11-991-172

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 230
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Rolled-over
Figure 224/TASK 70-52-11-991-173

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 231
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Ruptured
Figure 225/TASK 70-52-11-991-174

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 232
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Scored - A scratch or scratches of large depth
(with some removal of the material) made
with a sharp object during the operation
of the part.
(Ref. Fig. 226/TASK 70-52-11-991-175)
Scratch - A small surface cut with not much depth

made with a sharp object or particle.
Material is not usually removed.
(Ref. Fig. 227/TASK 70-52-11-991-176)
Seized Frozen, jammed, Movement between the parts is stopped

stuck because the clearance is not sufficient.
Caused because of heat or unwanted
particles.
Sheared Cut Is when two surfaces move in relation to

each other along the same axis in
opposite directions. This will cause the
details that hold the two surfaces
together to break.
(Ref. Fig. 228/TASK 70-52-11-991-177)
Skidding - Is surface damage to balls, rollers and

races of bearings. It is seen as an
intermittent matt silver effect on the
surface and occurs because of
intermittent loads during use.
(Ref. Fig. 229/TASK 70-52-11-991-178)
Sludged Gummed Very small particles of unwanted material

collected in one location.
Softened Perished Below the specified elasticity.
Spalled Plucked A rough broken area on the surface of a

material. Usually caused because of
surface cracks or inclusions when a load
is put on the surface.
(Ref. Fig. 230/TASK 70-52-11-991-179)
Spinning - Damage caused when a bearing race is

turned too much.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 233
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Scored
Figure 226/TASK 70-52-11-991-175

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 234
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Scratch
Figure 227/TASK 70-52-11-991-176

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 235
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Sheared
Figure 228/TASK 70-52-11-991-177

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 236
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Skidding
Figure 229/TASK 70-52-11-991-178

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 237
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Spalled
Figure 230/TASK 70-52-11-991-179

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 238
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stretched Growth The part is made larger as a result of
conditions of operation.
Stripped - The removal of material by force. Usually

related to threads and insulation.
Torn - The materail is pulled apart.

(Ref. Fig. 231/TASK 70-52-11-991-180)
Untwisted Unwound An unsatisfactory decrease in the angular

adjustment. The part tries to become
straight.
Worn - The material of the part is erroded away

excessively because of operation or use.
Wrecked - The damage is too bad for continued use.
Subtask 70-52-11-918-051
B. The Condition of Metal Parts
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acceptable OK Statisfactory for continued use.
Not inspected -
Class of part - The nozzle guide vane class is the

too low angular deviation between the airfoil
chord and the buttresses.
Class of part - The nozzle guide vane class is the

too high angular deviation between the airfoil
chord and the buttresses.
Clearance above - Unsatisfactory tolerances have collected.

maximum (Not because of wear)
Clearance above - Unstaisfactory tolerances have collected.

minimum (Not because of wear)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 239
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Torn
Figure 231/TASK 70-52-11-991-180

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 240
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clearance end - -
too much
Compression or - Compression or tension load is lower than

tension velow specified.
minimum
Compression or - Compression or tension load is higher

tension above than specified.
maximum
Damaged during - -
transit
Deterioration - -
in storage
Dimension below - Below the engineering drawing dimension

minimum or other specified dimension.
Dimension above - Above the engineering drawing dimension

maximum or other specified dimension.
Emission low - Is the low output of electrical tubes; it

shows an unsatisfactory tube.
Finish not to - Is the condition of the surface finish;

specification not surface damage.
Frequency out - The frequency of vibrations of a part are

of limits above permitted limits.
Hardness below - Found with Rockwell, Brinell or

limits alternative hardnesss tests.
Hardness above - Found with Rockwell, Brinell or

limits alternative hardness tests.
Magnetism low - Low or no magnetism of permanently

magnetized parts.
Mis-matched - A condition caused because of the

incorrect relation of parts.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 241
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mis-positioned Mis-aligned, The incorrect installation of a part
reversed, cocked which results in damage to the part or
related parts.
Obsolete Superseded The part is not in use.
Out of balance - The weight is not equally symmetrical

around the axis. This condition is to be
examined if there is no apparent damage.
Out of round Elongated The diameters of the part are not

constant.
Out of square - The related surfaces are not at the

specified right angle.
Part removed - A part removed as a precaution until an

pending investigation is done and a technical
investigation decision is made on its condition.
Received - -
disassembled
Resistance high - High electrical resistance in an

electrical circuit that causes incorrect
circuit operation.
Resistance low - Low electrical resistance in an

electrical circuit that causes incorrect
circuit operation.
Tension or - Tension or compression load is lower than

compression is specified.
below minimum
Tension or - Tension or compression load is higher

compression than is specified.
above maximum
Time expiration Part retired The part is not used because of a time
limit.
Voltage erratic - Caused because of the intermittent or

irregular flow of current.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 242
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage - none - Caused because of an unwanted current
- (circuit path to ground or between leads of
shorted or circuits that are usually at a different
grounded) voltage.
Voltage - none - Caused because an electrical circuit is

- (circuit not complete because of a break beween
open) electrical connections.
Subtask 70-52-11-918-052
C. Types of Damage to Composite Materials.
(1) Unbond (or Disbond)

The separation of two bonded surfaces
(Ref. Fig. 232/TASK 70-52-11-991-181)
There are two types of unbond as follows:
(a) Adhesive failure

This is failure at the joint between the bonded surface and the
adhesive. The adhesive stays on one of the surfaces.
For honeycomb structures, adhesive failure can be divided in to
two types.
1
_ Failure at the joint between the adhesive and the surface
layer of the honeycomb. Adhesive stays on the honeycomb but
not on the related position on the surface layer.
(Ref. Fig. 233/TASK 70-52-11-991-182, 234/TASK 70-52-11-991-
183)
NOTE : The adhesive will stay on the surface layer at the

____
locations related to the honeycomb cells.
2
_ Failure at the joint between the adhesive and the honeycomb.
The adhesive stays on the surface layer but not on the
honeycomb. This is usually known as pull out.
(Ref. Fig. 233/TASK 70-52-11-991-182)
(b) Cohesive failure

This is failure in the adhesive material. The adhesive stays on
each surface.
(Ref. Fig. 235/TASK 70-52-11-991-184)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 243
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Unbond
Figure 232/TASK 70-52-11-991-181

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 244
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Unbond
Figure 233/TASK 70-52-11-991-182

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 245
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Unbond (Adhesive Failure)

Figure 234/TASK 70-52-11-991-183

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 246
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Unbond (Cohesive Failure)

Figure 235/TASK 70-52-11-991-184

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 247
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

NOTE : Unbond which occurs in composites can also occur in
____
honeycomb structures with metal perforate and
non-perforate surface layers.
(2) Delaminated
This is the separation of layers in a composite laminate.
(Ref. Fig. 236/TASK 70-52-11-991-185)
(3) Cracked or split

A crack or split through a composite laminate; is seen as a small
opening in the composite surface layer or the complete composite
thickness. It is usually caused when the material is hit or because
of distortion.
(Ref. Fig. 237/TASK 70-52-11-991-186)
NOTE : Cracks can occur in locations that are filled or have large
____
quantities of resin. These are only surface defects and must
be correctly identified from cracks in the composite laminate.
(Ref. Fig. 238/TASK 70-52-11-991-188)
(4) Fretted
This is seen as a rubbed surface with the protection removed from the
fibers, this can result in broken fibers.
(Ref. Fig. 239/TASK 70-52-11-991-187)
(5) Eroded
This is seen as the removal of the surface resin layer caused because
of the effects of weather. When the protection is removed from the
fibers it can make the surface rough. It is possible for the fibers
to become eroded.
(Ref. Fig. 238/TASK 70-52-11-991-188)
(6) Cavity
This is an empty space that occurs usually in the surface layers with
a large quantity of resin or infilled locations.
(Ref. Fig. 238/TASK 70-52-11-991-188)
(7) Impact damage

There are two groups of impact damage:
(a) Sharp object

Usually a split or a crack, possibly with related delamination
near the damage.
(Ref. Fig. 240/TASK 70-52-11-991-189)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 248
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Delaminated
Figure 236/TASK 70-52-11-991-185

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 249
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Cracked/Split
Figure 237/TASK 70-52-11-991-186

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 250
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Eroded and Cavities

Figure 238/TASK 70-52-11-991-188

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 251
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Fretted
Figure 239/TASK 70-52-11-991-187

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 252
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Impact Damage
Figure 240/TASK 70-52-11-991-189

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 253
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Blunt object
Usually delamination of the layers with a possible related split,
crack or unbond. Damage usually extends out of the immediate
location of the damage.
(Ref. Fig. 240/TASK 70-52-11-991-189)
NOTE : In honeycomb sandwich structures, impact damage could

____
include other types of damage to the honeycomb.
(8) Torn fibers

Strips of lifted surface fibers, pulled and peeled along the fiber
length. Damage is frequently made larger because of the air flow
until the fiber breaks.
(Ref. Fig. 241/TASK 70-52-11-991-190)
(9) Fire or heat damage

This can cause one or all of the conditions that follow:
(a) Blistered
This is bubbles on the surface caused because of local
delamination below the surface layer.
(Ref. Fig. 242/TASK 70-52-11-991-191)
(b) Scorched
This is seen as a change in color of the surface layer.
(c) Resin degradation

This is deterioration of the resin of a composite laminate, at
the surface and also internally, which results in delamination
and loose fibers.
(Ref. Fig. 243/TASK 70-52-11-991-192)
(10) Fluid diffusion

This is fluid leakage through a composite material that has high
porosity. This is usually related to wet lay up assemblies.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 254
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Torn Fibers
Figure 241/TASK 70-52-11-991-190

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 255
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Blistered
Figure 242/TASK 70-52-11-991-191

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 256
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Scorched
Figure 243/TASK 70-52-11-991-192

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-52-11

Page 257
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

POWER PLANT WIRING STANDARD PRACTICES - ATA INDEX - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
R
All the data in Chapter/Section 70-71 are related to the V2500 Power Plant
only. The location of the data for the repair of all the harness connectors
and wires is shown below.
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| SUBJECT | CH-SE-SU | IAE NO. |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| General - V2500 Power Plant | 70-71-01 | - |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Vendor Codes, Names and Addresses | 70-71-02 | - |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Connector/Insert Arrangement | 70-71-12 | - |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Backshell Lockwire Procedure | 70-71-13 | VRS3900 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Wire Harness Lacing Procedure | 70-71-14 | VRS3901 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Backshell and Connector | | |
| Replacement Procedure | 70-71-20 | VRS3902 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Contact Replacement Procedure | 70-71-21 | VRS3903 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Wire Insulation Repair Procedure | 70-71-22 | VRS3904 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Wire Splice Repair Procedure | 70-71-23 | VRS3905 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| Shielded Wire Replacement | | |
| Procedure | 70-71-24 | VRS3906 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
| EGT, T2.6 and T3 Electrical Harnesses | | |
| Terminal Lug Repair Procedure | 70-71-25 | VRS1801 |
|--------------------------------------------------|------------|-----------|
R NOTE : For further details, refer to CMM: Electrical Harnesses and Cables:
____
CMM-EHC-V2500-1IA
R NOTE : For wire details, refer to AWL chapter 00, section INTRO, step 4.E
____

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-00

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2. __________________
Repair effectivity
|-------------|-----------|-------------------------| ------------------------|
| | | | |
| IPC REF.N0. | FIG/ITEM | NOMENCLATURE | APPLICABLE IAE |
| | | | REPAIR N0. |
|-------------|-----------|-------------------------| ------------------------|
R | 23-44-41 | 80/001 | Interphone Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-11-43 | 80/060 | P2/T2 Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-11-43 | 80/110 | P2/T2 Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-51-41 | 80/001 | EEC Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-51-42 | 83/001 | EEC and Ignition | |
| | | Supply Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-51-43 | 83/010 | General Services Harness| VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
| 71-51-44 | 80/010 | Ignition Supply Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-41 | 81/001 | Core Services Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-41 | 81/010 | Fire Detection System A | |
| | | Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-41 | 81/010 | Cabin Services Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-42 | 81/230 | Fire Detection Sytem B | |
| | | Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
| 71-52-43 | 80/010 | EEC Core Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906, |
| | | | and VRS1801 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-44 | 80/020 | EEC Link Core Harness | VRS3900, VRS3902, |
| | | | VRS3903, VRS1801 |
| | | | |
R | 71-52-45 | 80/770 | EGT Harness | VRS3900, VRS3902, |
| | | | VRS3903, VRS1801 |
| | | | |
| 78-32-47 | 80/250 | L/H Thrust Reverser | |
| | | Wiring Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
| | | | |
| 78-32-77 | 80/230 | R/H Thrust Reverser | |
| | | Wiring Harness | VRS3900 thru VRS3906 |
|-------------|-----------|-------------------------|-------------------------|

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-00

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

GENERAL - POWER PLANT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________________________________
R 1. _________________
V2500 POWER PLANT
A. General
(1) All the power plant components and connectors are identified by a
R Functional Item Number referred to as the FIN.
(2) All the connectors are of the rear release type. All the contacts are
removed and inserted from the rear of the connector. This allows
R individual replacement of crimp contacts without damage to the
R connector.
(3) The connectors have backshells to relieve stress and prevent force on
the cable leads at the contact joints. The individual circuit shields
R (braided layer) connect to the backshell ground interface. The
R backshells have a grounding ferrule which goes into the body of the
R backshell and gives a full peripheral ground termination.
(4) The manufacturer requirements of the connectors are more than the
military specification. When you order a connector, you must order by
R the connector part number and vendor code only. Do not order by the
R military specification number.
(5) You must inspect each cable assembly before you disassemble the
assembly.
(a) Examine each cable assembly for the conditions that follow:
1
_ Cable for chafed insulation or worn braid
2
_ Cable for damaged sleeves
3
_ Broken thermocouple terminals or lugs
R 4
_ Connectors for bent, broken or recessed contacts
5
_ Connectors for worn or stripped threads
R 6
_ Backshells for broken, worn or stripped threads.
(b) Replace all the detail parts that show too much damage. (Refer to
R the applicable removal, installation or test procedure in Chapter
R 70-71-20.).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-01

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) All the connectors are not the same. Carefully examine the connectors
R for the correct FIN, part number, and connection location to prevent
R possible cross-connection of the connectors.
R (7) A sharp bend, twist or pull can cause damage to the wires and wire
R bundles. This type of force can cause damage to the conductor.
(8) Good standard shop practices and safety precautions should be

R followed at all times. This prevents injury to persons and damage to
R the equipment.
R (9) You must replace a wire or cable with the same type of wire. To get
R the correct data on the wire type and wire length, you must refer to
the 92-90 Master Wire List. Refer to the applicable installation and
test procedure in Chapter 70-71-20.
(10) Wire Identification. All the wires are identified with a label on
each wire. The identification of the wire label number is shown
below.
Example of a wire identification code is 5A001W20
5 A 001 W 20
- - --- - --
5 - Manufacturer
__
5 = JAEC
8 = SHORTS
9 = ROHR
A - Individual loom
-
A thru W
001 - Wire number
---
W - Wire color code
--
B - Blue
F - Orange
R - Red
W - White
Y - Yellow
A - Alumel (Green)
C - Chromel (White)
20 - Wire gage number
--

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-01

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

R (11) Clip / Clamp Data:
R All clips must hold the harness in bundles, to make sure it cannot
R move through the clips.
R Always make sure that the wires and clip protection materials are not
R trapped when the clips are closed.
R Also the clips must not hold the bundles too tightly, because this
R causes damage to the clip bundles.
R When two or more harness bundles go through the same clip, the
R bundles must be parallel to each other, through the clip, to form one
R harness bundle.
R Because of known differences in the outer diameters of the harness
R bundles, the specified clips will possibly be too large or too small.
R It is thus permitted to use clips three clip sizes above or below the
R usual dimension. This procedure only applies to open wire and closed
R electrical harnesses.
R NOTE : Only clips from the same part number range must be specified
____
R and used.
R When the bundle dimension is between the specified clip steps, the
R larger clip must be used. The bundle diameter can then be increased
R with tape (Material No. V02-148).
R At general locations the clips must not be installed above the clip
R centerline tie mark, if available. They must be installed on the
R correct side of the tie mark in the limits of the clip area.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-01

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

VENDOR CODES, NAMES AND ADDRESSES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_____________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
This chapter gives all the supplier code numbers, names and addresses that
are used in Chapters 70-71.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
| CODE N0. | SUPPLIER NAMES AND ADDRESSES |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | |
| F0225 | Souriau et EIE SA United Kingdom outlet: |
| | Div Connexion Et Spatial Souriau UK Ltd. |
| | BP 410 Snakely Mill |
| | 92103 Boulogne Billancourt Loudwater High Wycombe |
| | Cedex, France Buckinghamshire HP10 9QY England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 0ABG9 | Yokogawa Aviation Co. Ltd. |
| | 3-11-16 Kagiyama, Iruma-Shi |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| S5217 | Nippon Oil Seals Co. Ltd. |
| | 12-15 Shiba Diamon-1 |
| | Chome Minato-Ku |
| | Tokyo, Japan |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| U0425 | Pyle-National Ltd. |
| | Sherbrook Road |
| | Daybrook |
| | Nottingham NG5 6AT England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| U0546 | Kern Electrical Components Ltd. |
| | Orpheus House |
| | Callera Industrial Park |
| | Aldermaston |
| | Berkshire RG7 4QW England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| K1636 | European Outlet |
| | AMPS Inc. of Great Britain Ltd. |
| | Stanmore (London) |
| | Middlesex 929 547 England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| U1558 | Schlumberger Industries |
| | Weston UK Transducer Division |
| | 580 Great Cambridge Road |
| | Enfield |
| | Middlesex EN1 3RX England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 00779 | AMPS Inc. European Outlet: |
| | 2800 Fulling Mill AMPS Inc. of Great Britain Ltd. |
| | P. 0. Box 3608 Stanmore (London) |
| | Harrisburg, Pennsylvania Middlesex 929 547 England |
| | 17105 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 04963 | Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co. |
| | Adhesive Coatings and Sealer |
| | Div. |
| | 6801 River Place Blvd |
| | Mail Stop A143-3N-01 |
| | Austin, Texax 94023 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 06090 | Ray Chem Corp. European Outlet: |
| | 300 Constitution Drive Ray Chem Ltd. |
| | Menlo Park, California 94025 Edison Road |
| | South Dorcan |
| | Swindon |
| | Wiltshire SN3 5HH England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 06324 | Glenair Inc. European Outlet: |
| | 1211 Air Way Glenair International Ltd. |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Glendale, California 91201 Park Works Park Road |
| | Mansfield Notts NG19 8EF |
| | England |
| | |
|__________|_________________________________________________________________|
| | |
| 07099 | Moxness Products Inc. |
| | 1914 Indiana St. |
| | Racine, Wisconsin 53405-3646 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 11139 | Deutsch Co. European Outlet: |
| | Engineered Connecting Devices Deutsch Compagnie |
| | 700 S . Hathaway Municipal Airport 10, rue Lionel |
| | Banning, California Terrau B.P.207-92502 |
| | 92220 Rueil Malmaison |
| | CEDEX France |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 11851 | Daniels Manufacturing Corp. |
| | 6103 Anno Avenue |
| | Orlando, Florida 32809-5033 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 14283 | Matrix science Corp. European Outlet: |
| | P.O. Box 3309 Matrix Science Corp. |
| | Torrance California Mill Lane |
| | 90503-3807 Alton |
| | Hampshire GU34 2QJ England |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 16902 | Simpson Electric Co. |
| | Simpson Instruments Div. |
| | 853 Dundee Ave. |
| | Elgin, Illinois |
| | 60120-3090 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 17549 | ITT Cannon Ltd. U.S. Outlet: |
| | 4 Cannon Court ITT Cannon Ltd. |
| | Whitby Electro Air Corp. |
| | Ontario L1N5VA Canada 2270 Marietta Blvd. N.W. |
| | Atlanta, Georgia 30325 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 2R306 | Davis Instrument Co., Inc. |
| | 20 Washington Ave. |
| | P.O. Box 120 |
| | Haddonfield, New Jersey |
| | 08033-3319 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 30119 | Ideal Industries Inc. |
| | 1008 Becker Place |
| | Sycamore, Illinois 60178 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 24655 | Genrad Inc. |
| | EMT Electronic Test Mfg. Group |
| | 300 Parker Ave. |
| | Concord, Massachusetts 01742 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 40912 | Mine Safety Appliances Co. |
| | 201 N. Braddock Ave. |
| | P.O. Box 430 |
| | Pittsburg, Pennsylvania 15230 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 49367 | Pyle-National Co. |
| | Div. of Brand-Rex Co. |
| | 1334 N. Kostner Ave. |
| | Chicago, Illinois |
| | 60651-1605 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | |
| 53655 | Scott Aviation |
| | Div. Figgie International Inc. |
| | 225 Erie St. |
| | Lancaster, New York 14086-9501 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 56501 | Thomas and Betts Corp. |
| | 920 Route 202 |
| | Raritan, New Jersey 08869-1420 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 58164 | Astro Tool Corp. |
| | 21615 S.W. |
| | Tualatin Valley Highway |
| | Beaverton, Oregon 97006-1329 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 59364 | Garrett Fluid Systems A Unit |
| | of Allied Systems |
| | 1300 West Warner Road |
| | P.O. Box 22200 |
| | Tempe,AZ 85282 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 71468 | ITT Cannon Division |
| | ITT Corp. |
| | 666 East Dyer Road |
| | Santa Ana, California 90602 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 74116 | New England Electric Wire Corp. |
| | 365 Main St. |
| | Lisbon, New Hampshire 03585 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 77820 | Amphenol Products |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPLIER | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Bendix Connector Operations |
| | 40-60 Delaware Ave. |
| | Sidney, New York 13838 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 80164 | Keithley Instruments Inc. |
| | 28775 Aurora Rd. |
| | Cleveland, Ohio 44139 |
| | |
|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| 82110 | Gudebrod Inc. |
| | 262 King St. |
| | P.O. Box 357 |
| | Pottstown, Pa. 19464 |
| | |
|__________|_________________________________________________________________|
| | |
| 94021 | Mitsubishi Heavy Industires |
| | Kobe, Japan |
| | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-02

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CONNECTOR/INSERT ARRANGEMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
A. Description
This chapter gives the description, part numbers, and insert arrangements
of the connectors that follow which are used on the V2500 Power Plant.
- ASN-E0442/0444 connector series
- BSK connector series
- D38999 connector series
- T3K connector series
- M83723 connector series
- 892 connector series
- 981 connector series
- ESC10 connector series
B. Insert Arrangement
The insert arrangement is determined by the connector shell size and the
contact arrangement.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2. _________________________
ASN E0444/0442 Connectors
The ASN-E0442/0444 connector series,agree to MIL-C-83723 Series III

connector.
Example of identification code is ASN-E0442SE08-03PN:
(Ref. Fig. 001, 002)
ASN - E0442 SE 08 - 03 P N
------------- -- -- -- - -
ASN - Connector Type
--- E0442 = Shield plug with ratchet (self-locking)
E0444 = Square flange receptacle
SE - Class
-- SE = 500 deg. F (260 deg. C) cyclic stainless steel
08 - Shell Size
-- 08, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
03 - Contact Arrangement
-- Refer to Figures 001 and 002
P - Contact Type
- P = Pin
S = Socket
N - Position/Polarization Code
- N = Normal,
6, 7, 8

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

ASN-E0442/E0444 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

ASN-E0442/E0444 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3. ______________
BSK Connectors
The BSK connector series agree to MIL-C-83723 Series III connectors.

Example of identification code is BSK-12F12-20SD08-(Y126)
(Ref. Fig. 003, 004, 005)
BSK - 12 F 12 - 20 S D 08 - (Y126)
--- -- - -- -- - - -- ------
BSK - Connector Type
--- BSK = Threaded, stainless steel
firewall qualified to Boeing Co.
BACC63BR/BT specifications
(O ring designation)
12 - Shell Style
-- 12 = Threaded non-decoupling plug (self-locking)
17 = Square flange receptacle
F - Shell Modification
- F = 360 degree accessory
teeth with grounding
12 - Shell Size
-- 12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 28
20 - Insert Arrangement
-- Refer to Figures AEM0, AGM0 and AJM0
S - Contact Style
- P = Pin
S = Socket
D - Contact Finish/Nomenclature
- D = Gold by MIL-C-39029
08 - Alternate Keying
-- Omit for normal, 06, 07, 08, 09
(Y126) - Variations
------ Y126 = Contact marking by
MIL-C-83723, MIL-C-83733,
and MIL-C-83734 (Required
for all V2500 power plant
connectors)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

BSK Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

BSK and ESC10 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

BSK and ESC10 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 005

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

4. _________________
D38999 Connectors
The D38999 connector series agree to MIL-C-38999 Series III connectors.

Example of identification code is D38999/26KA98SN
(Ref. Fig. 006)
D38999 /26 K A 98 S N
------ --- - - -- - -
D38999 - Connector Type
------
/26 - Shell Style
--- 26 = Threaded non-decoupling plug (self-locking)
K - Class
- K = Stainless steel firewall
A - Shell Size
- A = 09
B = 11
G = 21
-- Refer to Figure ALM0
S - Contact Style
- P = Pin
S = Socket
N - Alternate Keying
- N = Normal,
D

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

D38999 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 006

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

5. ______________
T3K Connectors
The T3K connector series agree to MIL-C-38999 Series III connectors.

Example of identification code is T3K-1209-98SA
(Ref. Fig. 007, 008, 009)
T3 K - 12 09 - 98 S A
-- - -- -- -- - -
T3 - Connector Line
--
K - Class
12 - Shell Style
-- 12 = Threaded non-decoupling plug (self-locking)
09 - Shell Size
-- 09, 11, 13, 15, 17, 21
-- Refer to Figures ANM0, APM0 and ARM0
S - Contact Style
- P = Pin
S = Socket
A - Alternate Keying
- N = Normal,
A, B, C, D, E

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 11
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

T3K Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 007

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 12
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 008

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 13
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500


Figure 009

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 14
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

6. _________________
M83723 Connectors
The M83723 connector series agree to MIL-C-83723 Series III connector.

Example of identification code is M83723-83K1610N
(Ref. Fig. 010)
M83723 - 83 K 16 10 N
------ -- - -- -- -
M83723 - Connector Type
------
83 - Shell Style
-- 83 = Square flange receptacle
95 = Stainless steel plug (self-locking)
K - Class
16 - Shell Size
-- 10, 16
-- Refer to Figure 010
N - Alternate Keying
- N = Normal

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 15
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

M83723 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 010

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 16
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

7. ______________
892 Connectors
The 892 connector series agree to MIL-C-5015G, Class K connector.

Example of identification code is 892-26K-14S-5-S-N
(Ref. Fig. 011)
892 - 26 K - 14S 5 - S - N
--- -- - --- - - -
982 - Connector Type
---
26 - Configuration
-- 26 = Coupling plug (self-locking)
K - Class
- K = Fire resistant (standard)
14S - Shell Size
--- 14S
- Refer to Figure AVM0
S - Contact Style
- S = Socket
N - Insert Position
- Blank = Normal

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 17
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

892 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 011

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 18
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

8. ______________
981 Connectors
The 981 connector series agree to MIL-C-5015 connector.

Example of identification code is 9816KS10SL-3S:
981 6 KS 10SL - 3 S
--- - -- ---- - -
981 - Connector Type
---
6 - Configuration
- 6 = Coupling plug (self-locking)
KS - Class
-- KS - Firewall, stainless steel shell,
passivated, non-flammable hard
dielectric and fluid resistant
insert
10SL - Shell Size
---- 10SL
- Number of Contacts = 3
Size of Contacts = No. 16
S - Contact Style
- S = Socket
- Insert Position
- Blank = Normal
9. _______________________________________________________________________
The ESC10 connector sreies agree to MIL-C-83723 Series III K connector.
A. Example of a identification code is ESC10KE0203P60:

(Ref. Fig. 012)
ESC 10 KE 0 12 03 P 6 0
--- -- -- - -- -- - - -

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 19
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

ESC10 Connector Contact Arrangements

Figure 012

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 20
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

ESC - Connector Type
ESC = Stainless Steel Shield plug with ratchet (self-locking)
KE - Class
-- KE = Sealed plug with housing in passivated stainless steel,
crimped contacts, fire resistant, with a maximun operating
temperature of 500 deg F (260 deg C).
SE = Sealed plug with housing in passivated stainless steel,
crimped contacts, fire resistant, plug with RFI screening
ring with a maximun operating temperature of 500 deg F
(260 deg C).
0 - Shell Style
- 0 and 6
12 - Sheel Size
-- 12,14,16,18,22,24,28
03 - Contact Arrangement
-- Refer to Figures 004,005 and 012
P - Contact Type
- P = Pin
S = Socket
6 - Polarization Code
- N = Normal,
6,7,8,9
0 - Variant Identifier
- 0 = Basic connector

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-12

Page 21
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

BACKSHELL LOCKWIRE PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
- This chapter gives the procedure to lockwire the coupling nut, shell, and
the strain relief clamp and coupling nut which are the detail parts of the
backshell assembly.
- Consumable materials can be replaced with equivalent items.
2. __________________
Standard equipment
- None
3. ___________________
Consumable material
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| REFERENCE | DESIGNATION |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| V02-127 | Lockwire (MS9226-03) |
| V02-138 | Lockwire (AS44725-01) |
| V02-141 | Lockwire (AS3214-02) |
| V02-146 | Lockwire (MS20995-C20) |
| V02-176 | Lockwire (MS20995-N20) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
4. ________________________________
Standard Practices for Lockwires
A. Procedure
(1) Lockwire is used to safety two or more parts together. It must also
be installed so that if the locked part tries to come loose, more
tension will be applied to the lockwire.
(2) Use a lockwire material of corrosion-resistant steel such as AMS 5689

for temperatures of up to 649 deg.C (1200 deg. F) as found in the
consumable materials.
(3) A maximum of three parts can be lockwired with the same wire.
(4) The maximum lockwire span between holes is 75 mm (2.95 in.).
(5) It is not necessary to twist the wire if the distance between the two
holes is 5 mm (0.19 in.) or less.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(6) When you safety the last part, continue to twist the lockwire to make
an end-piece 20 mm (0.78 in.) in length. Bend the end-piece to make
sure that it cannot become caught, then cut-off all the unwanted
lockwire. Always discard the unwanted lockwire, so that it cannot
cause damage.
(7) Use the applicable size lockwire to the correct hole size and the
correct number of twist to the inch (25,4 mm).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Lockwire | Wire Diameter | Twist to | Recommended |
| Number | Inch (mm) | the Inch | Hole Diameter |
| | | (25,4 mm) | Inch (mm) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| V02-138 | 0.019 - 0.021 | 9 - 12 | 0.037 - 0.057 |
| (AS44725-01) | (0,483 - 0,533) | | (0,094 - 1,44) |
| | | | |
| V02-127 | 0.024 - 0.026 | 9 - 12 | 0.060 - 0.080 |
| (MS9226-03) | (0,610 - 0,660) | | (1,53 - 2,03) |
| | | | |
| V02-141 | 0.030 - 0.034 | 7 - 10 | 0.060 - 0.080 |
| (AS3214-02) | (0,770 - 0,860) | | (1,53 - 2,03) |
| | | | |
| V02-146 | 0.019 - 0.021 | 9 - 12 | 0.037 - 0.057 |
| (MS20995-C20)| (0,483 - 0,533) | | (0,094 - 1,44) |
| | | | |
| V02 - 176 | 0.029 - 0.021 | 9 - 12 | 0.037 - 0.057 |
| (MS20995-N20)| (0,483 - 0,533) | | (0,094 - 1,44) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
5. _____________________________
Backshell Lockwire Procedures
Safety the backshell detail parts with lockwire by one of the procedures
that follows. Refer to step (1) or step (2) for the applicable backshell
type.
A. Procedure
(1) Safety the backshell with lockwire as follows:

(Ref. Fig. 001, 002)
(a) Cut a piece of new lockwire to safety the coupling nut and shell
and the strain relief clamp and coupling nut screw.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(b) Put the wire through the hole in the shell and coupling nut.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Backshell Lockwiring
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(c) Twist the wire. Do not pull the wire too much.
(d) Separate the twisted wire at the shells center hole.
(e) Put one of the wires through the center hole in a direction that
tightens and twist the wire.
(f) Separate the twisted wire at one of the two screws on the strain
relief clamp and coupling nut.
(g) Put one of the wires through the screw hole in a direction that
tightens and twist the wire to make a wire end-pièce.
(h) Bend the end-piece around the screw

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(i) Cut and discard the unwanted end-piece.
(j) Cut a piece of new lockwire to safety the shell center hole to
the screw on the strain relief clamp and coupling nut.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(k) Put the wire through the center hole in the shell.
(l) Twist the wire. Do not pull the wire too much.
(m) Separate the twisted wire at the screw hole on the strain relief
clamp and coupling nut.
(n) Put one of the wires through the screw hole in a direction that
tightens and twist the wire to make a wire end-piece.
(o) Bend the end-piece around the screw.
(p) Cut and discard the unwanted end-piece.
(2) Safety the backshell with lockwire as follows.

(Ref. Fig. 003, 004)
(a) Cut a piece of new lockwire to safety the coupling nut to the
shell.
(b) Put the wire through the hole in the coupling nut.
(c) Twist the wire. Do not pull the wire too much.
(d) Separate the twisted wire at the shell hole.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(e) Put one of the wires through the shell hole in a direction that
tightens and twist the wire to make an end-piece.
(f) Bend the end-piece toward the shell.
(g) Cut and discard the unwanted end-piece.
(h) Cut a piece of new lockwire to safety the shell to the strain
relief clamp and coupling nut flange hole.
(i) Put the wire through the same hole in the shell that you safetied
before.
(j) Twist the wire. Do not pull the wire too much.
(k) Separate the twisted wire at one of the two holes in the strain
relief clamp and coupling nut flange hole.
(l) Put one of the wire through the hole in a direction that tightens
and twist the wire to make an end-piece.
(m) Bend the end-piece toward the clamp.
(n) Cut and discard the unwanted end-piece.
(o) Cut a piece of new lockwire long enough to safety the screw to
the strain relief clamp and coupling nut flange hole.
(p) Put the wire through the hole in one of the two screws in a
direction that tightens.
(q) Twist the wire. Do not pull the wire too much.
(r) Separate the twisted wire at the hole in the strain relief clamp
and coupling nut flange.
(s) Put the wire through the hole in the clamp flange in a direction
that tightens and twist the wire to make a wire end-piece.
(t) Bend the end-piece toward the clamp flange.
(u) Cut and discard the unwanted end-piece.
(v) Do steps (0) thru (u) for the screw that remains in the strain
relief clamp and coupling nut.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-13

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

WIRE HARNESS LACING PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________________________________________
1. _______
General
- This chapter gives the procedure to lace the wire harness after the
replacement of an individual wire bundle or damaged lacing.
- Consumable materials can be replaced with equivalent items.
2. Standard
__________________
Equipment
- None
3. ___________________
Consumable Material
|-------------|------------------|-------------------------------------------|
| Part No. | Supplier Code | Designation |
|-------------|------------------|-------------------------------------------|
| 18DR | 82110 | Tape, Lacing (black) |
| 718G | 82110 | Tape, Lacing (white) |
| TTL20A | S5217 | Thermotite No. 200 (black) |
|-------------|------------------|-------------------------------------------|
4. __________________________________________
Standard Practices for Wire Harness Lacing
A. Procedure
(1) Use the PN 718G Lacing Tape (white) for general lacing of the wire
harness. Use the PN 18DR Lacing Tape (black) on the wire harness to
show the clamp positions on the harness.
NOTE : Do not use lacing tape on any wire harness that does not have
____
lacing tape installed before you repaired the harness, such as
wire harnesses with all wire braid or tape wrap.
(2) Lace the wire bundles in a neat arrangement and the lacing must not
be loose.
(3) The distance between the individual laces on the wire bundles is 50.8
mm (2 in.) maximum.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(4) Use a clove hitch knot to lace the wire bundles and then tie a square
knot to hold the lacing.
(5) A bundle of two or more wires must be laced together.
(6) The wire harness must be laced two times at the same position when
the harness is more than 38.1 mm (1.50 in.) in diameter.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Bundle
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(7) All wire bundles break-outs must be in the same plane as the bundle
center line and go along the same direction of the break-out.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
All the wire bundles must be laced like the figure.
(8) The wires in the harness groups must be put as straight as possible,
with a minimum of twists before you lace the harness.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(9) Cut the lacing tape ends to a minimum of 8 mm (0.31 in.) from the
knot.
5. General
______________
Lacing
Lace the wire harness by steps 1 thru 8. Use PN 718G Lacing Tape. Lace the
wire harness two times at the same position when the harness is more than
38.1 mm (1.50 in.) in diameter by step 9.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
6. Lacing
____________________________
with Two Wire Bundles
Lace the wire harness when there are two wire bundles in a harness assembly.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
A. Procedure
(1) Cut a piece of PN 718G Lacing Tape to lace the wire bundle.
(2) Lace the No. 1 and No. 2 wire bundles together.
(a) Start the lacing tape end B at the top of the No. 1 bundle.
(b) Wind end B of the lacing tape around the No. 1 bundle in a
counterclockwise direction one complete turn.
(c) Continue to wind end B around the No. 1 bundle in a

counterclockwise direction and put it between the No. 1 and No. 2
bundles.
(d) Wind end B around the No. 2 bundle in a clockwise direction one
turn and put it between No. 1 and No. 2 bundles.
(e) Continue to wind end B around No. 1 bundle in a counterclockwise

direction one turn and put it between the No. 1 and No. 2 and
pull ends A and B tight. The lacing will look like a 8.
(f) Do steps (a) thru (e) until you wind the bundles six times. Refer
to step 2.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Bundle Break-Out

Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Harness Assembly With Two Bundles

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Harness Lacing

Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(g) Wrap end B around the six laces between the No. 1 and No. 2
bundles three turns. Refer to step 3.
(h) Pull tightly on ends A and B and make a square knot.
(i) Cut the tape ends A and B to 8 mm (0.31 in.) minimum from the
knot.
7. Lacing
______________________________
with Three Wire Bundles
Lace the wire harness when there are three wire bundles in a harness
assembly.
(Ref. Fig. 005)
A. Procedure
(1) Cut a piece of PN 718G Lacing Tape to lace the wire bundles.
(2) Lace the No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3 wire bundles together.
(a) Start the lacing tape end B at the top of the No. 1 bundle. Refer
to step 1.
(b) Wind end B of the lacing tape around the No. 1 bundle in a
counterclockwise direction one complete turn.
(c) Continue to wind end B around the No. 1 bundle in a

bundles.
(d) Wind end B around the No. 2 bundle in a clockwise direction and
between the No. 2 and No. 3 bundles.
(e) Continue to wind end B around the No. 3 bundle in a

bundles.
(f) Continue to wind end B around the No. 2 bundle in a clockwise

direction and put it between the No. 2 and No. 1 bundle.
(g) Continue to wind end B around the No. 1 bundle in a

counterclockwise direction to contact end A. Pull ends A and B
tight. The lacing will look like two 8.Refer to step 1.
(h) Do steps (a) thru (g) until you wind the bundles six times. Refer
to step 2.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Harness Assembly With Three Bundles

Figure 005

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(i) Wind end B around the six laces between the No. 2 and No. 3
bundles three complete turns. Refer to step 3.
(j) Continue to wind end B around the six laces between the No. 1 and
No. 2 bundles three complete turns. Refer to step 3.
(k) Pull tightly on ends A and B and make a square knot.
(l) Cut ends A and B to 8 mm (0.31 in.) minimum from the knot.
8. Lacing
______________________________________________
a Clamp Position on a Harness Assembly.
(Ref. Fig. 004, 006)
A. Procedure
(1) Lace the datum clamp position.
(a) Lace the datum clamp lacing positions 8.5 mm (0.33 in.) on each
side of the datum clamp position. Use PN 18DR Lacing tape.
(b) Lace the datum clamp lacing positions by steps 1 thru 8.
(2) Lace the general clamp positions.
(a) Lace the general clamp position with PN 18DR Lacing Tape.
(b) Lace the general clamp position by steps 1 thru 8.
(c) Lace the general lacing positions with PN 718G Lacing Tape.
(d) Lace the general lacing positions 25.4 mm (1 in.) on each side of
the general clamp position by steps 1 thru 8.
(e) Coat the general and datum lacing tape knot ends with TTL20A
Thermotite or equivalent.
NOTE : Do not coat the knot.

____

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Clamp Position Lacing

Figure 006

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-14

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CONNECTOR, CONTACT AND BACKSHELL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
______________________________________________________
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________
1. General
_______
- This chapter gives the procedure for the replacement of a connector and
backshell on a cable assembly. Refer to AWL ATA 92-10 for connectors and
backshell part numbers and ATA 92-20 for pin numbers equipment list. Refer
to Chapter 70-71-12 for the connector contact/insert arrangement.
- Standard equipment and consumable material can be replaced with equivalent
items.
2. __________________
Standard equipment
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | | |
| Part No. | Code | Nomenclature | Application |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
| BT-BS-611 | 11815 | Strap Wrench |Removal and Installation|
| TG-70 | 11815 | Strap Wrench |of the backsshells |
| 600-400 | 06324 | Torque Wrench | |
| | 11851 | | |
| | | | |
| M81969/8-05 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga.|Removal and Insertion of|
| M81969/8-06 | 11851 | Removal Tool 20 ga. |the contacts |
| M81969/14/02 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion| |
| | 11851 | Tool 16 ga. | |
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| M81969/14/03 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion|Removal and Insertion of|
| | 11851 | Tool 20 ga. |the contacts |
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| MS27495A16 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 16 ga.|Removal and Insertion of|
| MS27495A20 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga.|the contacts |
| MS27495R16 | 11851 | Removal Tool 16 ga. | |
| | | | |
| Model 160B | 80164 | Digital Multimeter |Use to measure |
| | | |continuity and point-to-|
| | | |point circuits |
| | | | |
| Model 1863 | 24655 | Megohmmeter |Use to measure |
| | | |insulation resistance |
| | | | |
| HT210-16 | 11851 | Retention Test Toll |Use to test the 16 ga. |
| 67-016-02 | 11851 | Replacement Pin Tip |contact retention |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | | |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
| 68-016-01 | 11851 | Replacement Socket | |
| | | Tip | |
| | | | |
| HT210-20 | 11851 | Retention Test Tool |Use to test the 20 ga. |
| | | Tip | |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
3. ___________________
Consumable Material
-----------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | |
| Part No. | Code | Designation |
|--------------------|----------|-------------------------|
| Scotch No. 361 | 04963 | Tape, glass cloth |
| 20-90426-13 | 0ABG9 | Braid, Knit mesh |
| | | |
|--------------------|----------|-------------------------|
4. ___________________________________________
Removal of the Backshell from the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Remove the lockwire from the shell, strain relief clamp and coupling
nut, and the two screws.
(2) Make a mark on the connector backshell in relation to the connector

master keyway if the backshell is other than a straight type.
(3) Remove or loosen the screws from the strain relief clamp and coupling
nut.
(4) Remove the strain relief clamp and coupling nut from the backshell
with a PN BT-BS-611 or BT-70 Strap Wrench.
(5) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut to the rear over the
cables. If applicable, remove the glass cloth tape.
(6) Refer to figure for the correct backshell application.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Backshell Removal.
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(7) Move the grounding ferrule or the washer, ring, split ring, and tube
to the rear over the cables enough to permit the shell to be removed.
(8) Remove the coupling nut from the connector with a strap wrench. Move
the shell to the rear over the cables.
5. __________________________________________
Removal of the Contacts from the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(1) Apply a small piece of tape to each wire and write on the tape the
number of the connector hole from which the wire came.
(2) Use the applicable contact removal tool that is listed in the
standard equipment for the correct contact gage.
NOTE : All the power plant connector contacts (pin/socket) are

____
released from the rear of the connector.
(3) Remove the contact (pin/socket) as follows:
(a) Place the contact removal tool on the wire.
(b) Move the tool back on the wire while you hold against the wire at
the connector opening. The wire will move into the slot of the
tool.
(c) Push the tool along the wire into the rear of the connector until
it touches the bottom of the connector.
NOTE : When the tool touches the bottom of the connector it will
____
expand the collet from the contact to permit the contact
to be released from the connector.
(d) While you keep light pressure on the tool, hold the wire against
the serrated shoulder of the tool and remove both the wired
contact and tool.
(e) Do steps (a) thru (d) until you remove all the contacts.
6. _________________________________________
Replacement of the Connector or Backshell
NOTE : Refer to Chapter 20-71-10 for the Functional Item Number (FIN) and
____
connector part number of Chapter 20-71-11 for the backshell part
number.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Removal.
Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

7. _______________________________________________
Installation of the Contacts into the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(1) If the backshell detail parts were removed install the parts on the
cable assembly by the applicable illustration.
NOTE : The backshell detail parts cannot be installed on the

____
connector after the contacts are installed in the connector.
(2) Move the backshell detail parts to the rear over the cable assembly
to permit the contacts to be inserted in the connector.
(3) Use the applicable contact insertion tool given in the standard
equipment for the correct contact gage.
(4) If the connector is replaced, examine the connector part number and
make sure that it agrees with the correct FIN.
(5) When you install the contacts you must start with the wire in the
center connector cavity.
(6) Install the insertion tool on the contact.
(a) Put the wire between the slot and squeeze the wire into the slot
at the tool tip. Make sure the wire is in the slot at the tool
tip.
(b) Pull the wire back through the tool until the tip seats on the
rear shoulder of the crimp contact.
(7) Install the contact into the connector.
(a) Hold the connector in your hand.
(b) Use the mark on the wire to identify the correct contact
(pin/socket) location in the connector.
NOTE : The detailed wiring data from Termination A to Termination

____
B is found in the 92-20 Hook-Up List/Plugs and
receptacles.
(c) Install the wired contact into the correct cavity at the rear of
the connector with a strong and equal pressure.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Removal.
Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CAUTION: IF TOO MUCH PRESSURE IS USED WHEN YOU INSTALL THE CONTACT INTO THE
CONNECTOR, DAMAGE TO THE CONNECTOR COLLET TINES CAN OCCUR.
(d) When the contact is properly locked in the connector, a light

click sound can be heard.
NOTE : The click sound is made by the tines on the collet as they
____
lock in position behind the contact shoulder. This locks
the contact in the connector collet.
(e) Lightly pull back on the wire to feel if the contact is locked in
the collet.
(f) Remove the tool.
(8) Do steps (6) and (7) until all the contacts are installed.
8. ______________________
Contact Retention Test
A. Procedure
(1) Do a test on each contact to make sure it has a retention force of

between 31.1 N and 57.8 N (7 and 13 lbf.)
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE WHEN TESTING CONTACTS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CONTACT,
CONNECTOR GROMMET OR RETENTION TEST TOOL.
(2) Use the applicable retention test tools and replacement pin and
socket tools that are listed in the standard equipment for the
correct contact gage.
(3) Put the 16 or 20 gage retention test tool and replacement tip on the
contact so they are in a straight line.
(a) Use the pin replacement tips when you do a test of the socket
contacts.
(b) Use the socket replacement tips when you do a test of the pin
contacts.
(4) Hold this position when you do a test on each contact. This will give
the most accurate retention force reading.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(5) With the retention test tool in position on the contact do the test
that follows:
(a) Apply pressure on the tool until a minimum of half of the

color-coded area is covered.
(b) At this point 44.5 N (10 lbf.) of pressure has been applied.
(c) If the contact is still firmly held in the same position, the
contact retention is satisfactory.
(6) Do steps (3) thru (5) until all the contacts are tested.
9. ______________________________________________
Installation of the Backshell to the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(2) Move the coupling nut and shell forward over the cables.
(3) Align the mark you made before on the backshell with the connector
master keyway.
NOTE : The mark on the connector backshell correctly aligns the

____
connector and the backshell when you install the harness on
the engine.
(4) Install the coupling nut to the connector and tighten with a PN
BT-BS-111 or TG-70 Strap Wrench.
(5) Move the grounding ferrule or the tube, split ring, ring, and washer
forward over the cables and into the shell. Make sure the wire braid
is held under the grounding ferrule or split ring.
(6) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut forward over the cables
to the shell.
(7) Install the coupling nut on the shell.
(8) TORQUE the coupling nut to 10 lbf.in. (1.13 Nm) with a strap wrench
and a PN 600-400 Torque Wrench.
(9) Make sure all of the twists and bends are out of the cable.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(10) Wrap the cable with Scotch No. 361 Tape under the strain relief clamp
for the correct build-up under the clamp.
(11) Tighten the two screws on the clamp.
(12) TORQUE the two screws to between 10 and 20 lbf.in. (1.13 and 2.26
Nm).
10. _________________________
Backshell Continuity Test
A. Procedure
(1) Do a continuity test on the backshell to the connector. Use a Model

160B Digital Multimeter or equivalent.
(2) The resistance must be no more than 0.01 ohm.
(3) Do a continuity test on the backshell of Termination A to the

backshell of Termination B.
NOTE : The detailed wiring data from Termination A to Termination B

____
is found in the 92-20 Hook-Up Lists/Plugs and Receptacles.
(4) Each backshell must have continuity from Termination A to Termnation

B
11. __________________________
Insulation Resistance Test
A. Procedure
Do an insulation resistance test on all the repaired circuits. Use Model
1863 Megohmmeter or equivalent.
CAUTION: YOU MUST DISCONNECT ALL THE CONNECTORS WHICH HAVE A RELATION TO THE
CIRCUITS IN THE CONNECTOR THAT IS TESTED. FAILURE TO DO THIS WILL
CAUSE UNSATISFACTORY RESISTANCE INDICATIONS AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO
THE CIRCUITS.
(1) Do the insulation resistance test between each pair of wires that
have been repaired.
(2) Set the megohmmeter to the 100 volt DC scale.
(3) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the contact (pin or
socket) of one of the repaired wires. Connect the other test lead to
the contact (pin or socket) of the other repaired wire.
(4) The resistance should be infinity.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(5) Do the insulation resistance test between each repaired wire and the
braided shield.
(6) The resistance must be a minimum of 20 megohms.
backshell.
(9) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the backshell body of the
connector. Connect the other test lead to the contact (pin or socket)
of the connector.
(11) Safetying of the Backshell

- Lockwire the backshell by the procedure given in Chapter 70-71-13.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-20

Page 11
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CONTACT REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
- This chapter gives,the procedure for the replacement of a connector

R contact (pin or socket) on a cable assembly. Refer to AWL Engine Equipment
R List for connectors and backshell part numbers and ATA 92-20 for pin
R numbers equipment list. Refer to Chapter 70-71-12 for the connector
R contact/insert arrangement.
items.
2. __________________
Standard equipment
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | | |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
| BT-BS-611 | 11815 | Strap Wrench |Removal and Installation|
| TG-70 | 11815 | Strap Wrench |of the backsshells |
| 600-400 | 06324 | Torque Wrench | |
| | 11851 | | |
| | | | |
| M81969/8-05 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga.|Removal and Insertion of|
| M81969/8-06 | 11851 | Removal Tool 20 ga. |the contacts |
| M81969/14/02 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion| |
| | 11851 | Tool 16 ga. | |
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| M81969/14/03 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion|Removal and Insertion of|
| | 11851 | Tool 20 ga. |the contacts |
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| MS27495A16 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 16 ga.|Removal and Insertion of|
| MS27495A20 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga.|the contacts |
| | | | |
| Model 160B | 80164 | Digital Multimeter |Use to measure |
| | | |continuity and point-to-|
| | | |point circuits |
| | | | |
| Model 1863 | 24655 | Megohmmeter |Use to measure |
| | | |insulation resistance |
| | | | |

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 1
May 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | | |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
| | | Tip | |
| | | | |
| | | Tip | |
| | | | |
| M22520/1-01 or | 11851 | Crimp tool frame |Use to crimp electrical |
| equivalent | 58164 | |contact on wire |
| | | | |
| M22520/1-02 or | 11851 | Crimp tool locator |Use to crimp electrical |
| equivalent | 58164 | 16 ga. |contact on wire |
| | | | |
| M22520/1-04 or | 11851 | Crimp tool locator |Use to crimp electrical |
| equivalent | 58164 | 20 ga. |contact on wire |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
3. ___________________
Consumable Material
-----------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | |
|--------------------|----------|-------------------------|
| Scotch No. 361 | 04963 | Tape, glass cloth |
| 20-90426-13 | 0ABG9 | Braid, Knit mesh |
| | | |
|--------------------|----------|-------------------------|
4. ___________________________________________
Removal of the Backshell from the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001, 002)
(1) Remove the lockwire from the shell, strain relief clamp and coupling
nut, and the two screws.
(2) Make a mark on the connector backshell in relation to the connector

master keyway if the backshell is other than a straight type.
(3) Remove or loosen the screws from the strain relief clamp and coupling
nut.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Backshell Removal
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Removal
Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(4) Remove the strain relief clamp and coupling nut from the backshell
with a PN BT-BS-611 or BT-70 Strap Wrench.
(5) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut to the rear over the
cables. If applicable, remove the glass cloth tape.
(7) Move the grounding ferrule or the washer, ring, split ring, and tube
to the rear over the cables enough to permit the shell to be removed.
(8) Remove the coupling nut from the connector with a strap wrench. Move
the shell to the rear over the cables.
5. __________________________________________
Removal of the Contacts from the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(1) Apply a small piece of tape to each wire and write on the tape the
number of the connector hole from which the wire came.
(2) Use the applicable contact removal tool that is listed in the
NOTE : All the power plant connector contacts (pin/socket) are

____
(3) Remove the contact (pin/socket) as follows:
(a) Place the contact removal tool on the wire.
(b) Move the tool back on the wire while you hold against the wire at
the connector opening. The wire will move into the slot of the
tool.
(c) Push the tool along the wire into the rear of the connector until
it touches the bottom of the connector.
NOTE : When the tool touches the bottom of the connector it will
____
expand the collet from the contact to permit the contact
to be released from the connector.
(d) While you keep light pressure on the tool, hold the wire against
the serrated shoulder of the tool and remove both the wired
contact and tool.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(e) Do steps (a) thru (d) until you remove all the contacts.
6. ________________
Wire Preparation
- Cut the wire,at the rear edge of the damaged contact to remove the contact
from each wire.
7. ____________________
Striping of the Wire
- Strip the wire insulation 7 mm (0.27 in.),from the end of the wire with a
PN 45092 Mechanical Wire Stripper.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NOTE : When the 20 gage wire is used in a size 16 gage contact crimp barrel,
____
filler wire must be inserted along with the 20 gage wire conductor.
Use enough filler wire to make sure you have a correct pull test when
the barrel is crimped.
8. _______________________
Crimping of the Contact
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(1) Use the applicable crimp tool frame and locator given in the standard
equipment for the correct wire gage.
(2) Install the crimp tool positioner to the crimp tool frame as follows:
(a) Remove the lock clip from the lock ring on the positioner.
(b) Use the correct positioner which agrees with the contact gage
size to be crimped.
(c) Put the positioner on the tool frame lock plate with the
positioner pins aligned with the lockplate ring slots.
(d) Push the positioner into the tool frame and turn the positioner
90 degrees in a clockwise direction until you get a positive
lock.
(e) Install the lock clip to the positioner lock ring.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Stripping and Contact Crimping

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Crimp the replacement contact to the wire as follows:
(a) Raise and turn the tool frame selector knob until the number of
the knob agrees with the number on the positioners data plate
for the correct wire size. Align the number,on the knob to the
index mark on the tool frame and release the knob.
CAUTION: IF THE TOOL FRAME SELECTOR KNOB IS PUT IN THE WRONG POSITION, DAMAGE
TO THE CONTACT AND WIRE CAN OCCUR. ALSO THE CONTACT CAN BE LOOSELY
CRIMPED ON THE WIRE.
(b) Examine the wire to make sure the wire strands are not separated.
Carefully twist the wire strands in their normal direction of
twist to fit the contact wire hole.
(c) Install the stripped end of the wire into the contact wire hole.
(d) Push the wire into the contact wire hole until you feel it touch
the bottom.
NOTE : If the wire was incorrectly stripped, the wire will not
____
touch the bottom of the crimp barrel or there will be too
much bare wire at the rear shoulder of the barrel.
(e) Install the contact and stripped wire end through the tool frame
hole and into the positioner hole.
(f) Squeeze the tool frame handles together until the ratchet
releases.
NOTE : If too much or too little force is needed to squeeze the

____
tool frame handles together, the contact is not crimped
correctly.
Look at the crimp tool for the correct position for the
wire and contact size.
You cannot open the tool frame until the full crimp is
completed.
(g) Remove the crimped contact.
(h) Do steps (a) thru (g) until you crimp all the replacement
contacts on the wires.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

9. _______________________
Contact Continuity Test
A. Procedure
- Do a continuity test,on the replaced harness assembly contacts from

point-to-point. Use a Model 160B Digital Multimeter or a Model 260
Ohmmeter or equivalent.
NOTE : The detailed wiring data from Termination A to Termination B is

____
found in the 92-20 Hook-Up Lists/Plugs and Receptacles.
- Each circuit must have continuity from Termination A to Termination B

on each circuit.
10. _________________________
A. Procedure

(3) Do a continuity test on the backshell of Termination A to the


____
(4) Each backshell must have continuity from Termination A to Termnation

B
11. ______________________________________
Install the Contact into the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) Make sure the backshell detail parts were not removed from the cable
assembly.
(2) If the detail parts were removed, install the parts on the cable
assembly.

____
connector after the contacts are installed in the connector.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Insertion
Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Use the applicable contact insertion tool that is listed in the
(4) Move the backshell detail parts to the rear over the cable assembly
to permit the contacts to be inserted in the connector.
(5) Install the insertion tool on the contact.
(a) Put the wire between the slot and squeeze the wire into the slot
at the tool tip. Make sure the wire is in the slot at the tool
tip.
(b) Pull the wire back through the tool until the tip seats on the
(a) Hold the connector in your hand.
CAUTION : IF TOO MUCH PRESSURE IS USED WHEN YOU INSTALL THE CONTACT INTO THE
(b) Install the wired contact into the cavity at the rear of the
connector with a strong and equal pressure.
(c) When the contact is properly locked in the connector, a light

NOTE : The click sound is made by the tines on the collet as they
____
lock in position behind the contact shoulder. This locks
the contact in the connector collet.
(d) Lightly pull back on the wire to feel if the contact is locked in
the collet.
(e) Remove the tool.
(f) Do steps (a) thru (e) until you install all the contacts.
12. ______________________
Contact Retention Test
A. Procedure
(1) Do a test,on each contact to make sure it has a retention force of

3.11 daN (6.9915 lbf) to 5.78 daN (12.9939 lbf).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 11
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE WHEN TESTING CONTACTS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CONTACT,
(2) Use the applicable retention test tools and replacement pin and
(3) Put the 16 or 20 gage retention test tool and replacement tip on the
contact so they are in a straight line.
(a) Use the pin replacement tips when you do a test of the socket
contacts.
(b) Use the socket replacement tips when you do a test of the pin
contacts.
(4) Hold this position when you do a test on each contact. This will give
the most accurate retention force reading.
(5) With the retention test tool in position on the contact do the test
that follows:
(a) Apply pressure on the tool until a minimum of half of the

(b) At this point 4.45 daN (10.0039 lbf) of pressure has been
applied.
(c) If the contact is still firmly held in the same position, the
(6) Do steps (3) thru (5) until all the contacts are tested
13. ______________________________________________
Installation of the Backshell to the Connector
A. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(2) Move the coupling nut and shell forward over the cables.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 12
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Align the mark,you made before on the backshell with the connector
master keyway.

____
connector and the backshell when you install the harness on
the engine.
(4) Install the coupling nut to the connector and tighten with a PN
BT-BS-111 or TG-70 Strap Wrench.
(5) Move the grounding ferrule or the tube, split ring, ring, and washer
forward over the cables and into the shell. Make sure the knit mesh
strip goes outside the tube and split ring, but under the ring,
washer and strain relief clamp and coupling nut. Make sure the wire
braid is held under the grounding ferrule.
(6) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut forward over the cables
to the shell.
(7) Install the coupling nut on the shell.
(8) If applicable, wrap the cable with Scotch No. 361 Tape around the
cables under the strain relief clamp for the correct build-up under
the clamp.
(9) TORQUE the coupling nut to 10 lbfin (1,13 Nm) with a strap wrench and
a PN 600-400 Torque Wrench.
(10) Make sure all of the twists and bends are out of the cable.
(11) Tighten the two screws on the clamp.
(12) TORQUE the two screws 10 to 20 lbfin (1,13 to 2,26 Nm).
14. _________________________
A. Procedure


R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 13
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Do a continuity test,on the backshell of Termination A to the

____
(4) Each backshell must have continuity from Termination A to Termination

B
15. __________________________
Insulation Resistance Test
A. Procedure
- Do an insulation resistance test on all the repaired circuits. Use

Model 1863 Megohmmeter or equivalent.
CAUTION: YOU MUST DISCONNECT ALL THE CONNECTORS WHICH HAVE A RELATION TO
THE CIRCUITS IN THE CONNECTOR THAT IS TESTED. FAILURE TO DO THIS
WILL CAUSE UNSATISFACTORY RESISTANCE INDICATIONS AND POSSIBLE
DAMAGE TO THE CIRCUITS.
(1) Do the insulation resistance test between each pair of wires that
have been repaired.
(3) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the contact (pin or
socket) of one of the repaired wires. Connect the other test lead to
the contact (pin or socket) of the other repaired wire.
(4) The resistance should be infinity.
braided shield.
(6) The resistance must be a minimum of 20 megohm.
backshell.
(9) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the backshell body of the
connector. Connect the other test lead to the contact (pin or socket)
of the connector.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 14
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

16. __________________________
Safetying of the Backshell
- Lockwire the backshell,by the procedure given in Chapter 70-71-13.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-21

Page 15
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

WIRE INSULATION REPAIR PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
____________________________________________________________
1. ________________________________
Wire Insulation Repair Procedure
A. General
(1) This chapter gives the procedure for the wire insulation repair on
the power plant electrical wire harness.
(2) Consumable materials can be replaced with equivalent items.
(3) This is a group of words that is shown in this procedure.
(a) Harness - A single bundle of two or more branched group of

bundles terminated by connectors or terminal lugs.
(b) Bundle - A group of cables tied together with lacing tape.
(c) Cable - A group of unterminated wires enclosed by a metal shield

and insulated jacket.
(d) Wire - A single metallic strand that is insulated.
2. Standard
__________________
Equipment
- none.
3. ___________________
Consumable Material
____________________________________________________________________________
| PART No. | SUPPLIER | |
| | Code | DESIGNATION |
|_______________|_______________|____________________________________________|
| | | |
| Scotch No. 62 | 76381 | Electrical Silicone Tape |
| (V02-195) | 81349 | |
|_______________|_______________|____________________________________________|
4. ___________________________________
Shielded Wire Repair With No Splice
A. Procedure
(1) Repair the cable if the damage on the insulated jacket and braided
shield is acceptable as follows.
(a) The insulated jacket shows the braided shield up to 50 percent

around the cable and less than 50.8 mm (2 in.) length.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-22

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) The braided shield has 80 percent of the metal strands that are
not damaged at any one location.
(c) Check that the ends of the metal strands are not in contact with
the core of the wire. Trim metal strands as necessary.
(d) If the braid or external jacket is damaged more than this repair,
cut the wire and do the wire splice repair procedure given in
chapter 70-71-23.
(2) Remove the lacing tape from the wire harness to get access to the
damaged cable.
(3) Clean the cable 76.2 mm (3.000 in.) on each side of the area to be
repairedby the tape wrap.
(4) Wrap one layer of Scotch No. 62 Electrical Silicone Tape or

equivalent around the cable with a 20 percent overlap on each wrap of
the tape. Extend the tape oneach side ofthe worn area of the
insulated jacket 25.4 mm (1 in) or more.
(5) Wrap another layer of Scotch No. 62 Electrical Silicone Tape or

equivalent over the Silicone tape with a 20 percent overlap on each
wrap of the tape. Extend the silicone tape 12.7 mm (0.50 in.) on each
side of the insulation tape.
(6) Replace the wire harness lacing that was removed by the procedure
given in Chapter 70-71-14.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-22

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

WIRE SPLICE REPAIR PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
________________________________________________________
1. ____________________________
Wire Splice Repair Procedure
A. General
(1) This chapter gives the procedure for the wire splice repair on the
power plant electrical wire harness.


(3) Wires which cannot meet the wire splice repair limits or if the open
circuit cannot be found, the cable can be replaced by the procedure
(4) Replace the repaired cables when the harness is removed or during the
next shop visit of the engine.
(5) Standard equipment and consumable materials can be replaced with

equivalent items. The size of the shielded inner and outer ferrules
will change with the different wire gages and the number of
conductors.
(6) Refer to the 92-90 Master Wire List for the wire type, gage, length,
and Termination A to Termination B in the Aircraft Wiring Manual.
(7) This procedure is written for a 2-wire cable. If you need to put a
splice in a 3-wire cable, put the third splice in the cable so that
the insulation edges of the splices are at least 31,75 mm (1.25 in.)
apart.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

2. __________________
Standard Equipment
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |Supplier| | |
|------------- -|--------|------------------------|--------------------------|
| | | | |
| 45092 | 30119 | Strip Master Wire | Manually remove the |
| | | Stripper 16 thru 20 ga.| insulation from the |
| | | | cable and wire |
| | | | |
| 46673 | 00779 | Crimp Tool | Crimp all types of |
| | | | splices |
| | | | |
| WT440 | 56501 | Crimp Tool | Crimp the GSC series |
| or | | | shielded outer ferrules |
| WT540 | | | |
| or | | | |
| WT1540 | | | |
| | | | |
| Model 260 | 16902 | Ohmmeter | Used to measure |
| | | | continuity and point-to- |
| | | | point circuits |
| | | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. ___________________
Consumable material
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | |
| Scotch | 76381 | Masking Tape |
| No. 62 | 81348 | |
| | | |
| Moxness | 07099 | Tape, red rubber, self-bonding |
| 620-3/4 | | |
| | | |
| 322822 | 00779 | Wire Splice (alumel, for alumel thermocouple |
| or | | wires) |
| NAS1387-4 | | |
| or | | |
| NAS1387-5 | | |
| | | |
| 2-323876-2 | 00779 | Wire Splice (chromel, for chromel thermocouple|
| or | | wires) |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Supplier | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 1-322325-1 | | |
| | | |
| Gudebrod | 82110 | Lacing Tape |
| 718Z | | |
| | | |
| NEQ241636SP | 74116 | Tubular Braid, silver plate copper |
| | | |
| GSB Series | 56501 | Shielded Inner Ferrule |
| | | |
| GSC Series | 56501 | Shielded Outer Ferrule |
| | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. __________________________________
Wire Harness Splice Repair Limits.
A. General
(1) Do not splice the wires less than 152.4 mm (6 in.) from the connector
baskshell strain relief clamp.
(2) The wire splice repairs must not have a concentration at any one
location. The splice repair must not change the clamping or routing
of the wire harness.
(3) Do not splice the generator feeders or cables with the steel outer
braid.
(4) Splices must be moisture and abrasion resistant. Use a moisture

resistant tape wrap that is covered with an abrasion resistant sleeve
or tape when you do the repair.
(5) You must see the wire splice to do a visual inspection. do not put
the wire splices under the clamps or drip loops.
(6) Shielding where used is very important and must be continuous across
all the wire splices.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

5. ______________________
Unshielded Wire Repair
A. Procedure
damaged cable.
(2) Refer to the Aircraft Wire Lists, 92-90 Master Wire List for the
correct wire type, wire gage and wire color.
(3) Strip the insulation from each wire so the conductor can be inserted
into the splice correctly.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(4) Install the wire into the correct wire splice and crimp the splice.
Use the PN 46673 Crimp Tool.
(5) Wrap three layers of the Scotch No. 92 Electrical Silicone Tape
directly around the splice.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(6) Use two layers of Scotch No. 92 Electrical Silicone Tape and spiral
wrap beyond the insulation. Use a 50 percent overlap with the second
layer wrapped opposite to the first layer and tight enough to produce
a moisture resistant seal.
(7) Wrap the splice for abrasion protection as follows :
(a) Wrap the splice with two spiral layers of Scotch No. 62
Electrical Silicone Tape. Use a 50 percent overlap with the
second layer wrapped opposite to the first layer and extend the
wrap 25.4 mm (1.000 in.) beyond each of the initial tape wrap.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(b) Tie each end of the tape in place with PN Gudebrod 718Z Lacing
Tape. Use a clove hitch and square knot. Tighten the clove hitch
firmly before you tiethe square knot. Cut off the free ends to
6.35 to 12.7 mm (0.250 to 0.500 in.).
(8) Do a continuity test on the repaired wires point to point.

Each circuit must have continuity. Use a PN Model 260 Ohmmeter.
given in chapter 70-71-14.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Splice
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Moisture Resistant Tape Wrap

Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Abrasion Resistant Tape Wrap and Lacing Tape

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

6. ____________________
Shielded Wire Repair
A. Procedure
damaged cable.
(2) Refer to the Aircraft Wire Lists, 92-90 Master Wire List for the
correct wire type, wire gage and wire color.
(3) Trim the cable jacket and shield. Make sure 19.05 mm (0.750in.) of
the shield is shown. Cut each wire so that individual wire splices
are not opposite of each other.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(4) Use the correct size GSB Inner Shield Termination Ferrules and GSC
Outer Shield Termination Ferrules. Move one pair of the inner and
outer ferrules over each end of the cable. Move the ferrules clear of
the splice area.
(Ref. Fig. 005, 006)
(5) Select the correct size tubular braid for the shield splice.
Cut a lenght of the braid to cover the splice repair area.
(6) Expand the tubular braid and install over one end of the cable. Move
the braid clear of the splice repair area.
(7) Splice the individual wires as follows :
(a) Strip the insulation from each wire so the conductor can be
inserted into the splice correctly.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(b) Install the wire into the correct wire splice and crimp the
splice. Use the PN 46673 Crimp Tool.
(c) Wrap two layers of the Moxness 620-3/4 Red Rubber Tape directly
around the splice.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(d) Use two layers of Scotch No. 92 Electrical Silicone Tape and
spiral wrap beyond the insulation. Use a 50 percent overlap with
the second layer wrapped opposite to the first layer and tight
enough to produce a moisture resistant seal.
(Ref. Fig. 002)

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Two Conductor Shielded Cable Splice

Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

GSB Shielded Inner Ferrules

Figure 005

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

GSC Shielded Outer Ferrules

Figure 006

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 11
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(8) Straighten out the metal strands of the braided shield that are shown
on each side of the spliced area.
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(9) Position the inner ferrule near the end of the cable jacket and fold
the straighten out shielding back over the ferrule.
Make sure the metal strands of the braided shield are equally spaced
around the ferrule.
(10) Position one end of the tubular braid over the metal strands of the
shieldand move the outer ferrule over the tubular braid and inner
ferrule. Crimp the outer ferrule with the PN WT440, WT540 or WT1540
Crimp Tool and use the correct tool die for the outer ferrule.
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(11) Pull the tubular braid tight across the splice area.
(12) Position the inner ferrule near the end of the cable jacket and fold
the straighten out shielding back over the ferrule.
Make sure the metal strands of the braided shield are equally spaced
around the ferrule.
(13) Position the end of the tubular braid over the metal strands of the
shield and move the outer ferrule over the tubular braid and inner
ferrule. Crimp the outer ferrule with the PN WT440, WT540 or WT1540
Crimp Tool and use the correct tool die for the outer ferrule.
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(14) Trim the excess braid near with the outer end of the two outer
ferrules.
(15) Use two layers of Scotch No. 92 Electrical Silicone Tape and spiral
wrap the entire area 12.7 mm (0.500in.) beyond the ferrules. Use a 50
percent overlap with the second layer wrapped opposite to the first
layer and tight enough to produce a moisture resistant seal.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(16) Wrap the spliced cable for the abrasion protection as follows :
(a) Wrap the spliced section of the cable with two spiral layers of
Scotch No. 62 Electrical Silicone Tape. Use a 50 percent overlap
with the second layer wrapped opposite to the first layer and
extend the wrap 25.4 mm (1.000in.) beyond each of the initial
tape wrap.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 12
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Tubular Braid Installation

Figure 007

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 13
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Tie each end of the tape in place with PN Gudebrod 718Z Lacing
Tape. Use a clove hitch and square knot. Tighten the clove hitch
firmly before you tie the square knot. Cut off the free ends 6.4
to 12.7 mm (0.250 to 0.500in.).
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(17) Do a continuity test on the repaired wires point to point.

Each circuit must have continuity. Use a PN Model 260 Ohmmeter.
given in chapter 70-71-14.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-23

Page 14
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

SHIELDED WIRE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_______________________________________________________________
1. ___________________________________
Shielded Wire Replacement Procedure
A. General
(1) This chapter gives the procedure for a shielded wire replacement on
the power plant electrical wire harness. This does not include
externally braided harnesses and IDG power cables.


(3) Replace the repaired cables when the harness is removed or during the
next shop visit of the engine.
(4) Standard equipment and consumable materials can be replaced with

equivalent items.
(5) Refer to the 92-90 Master Wire List for the wire type, gage, lenth,
and Termination A to Termination B in the Aircraft Wiring Lists
2. __________________
Standard Equipment
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |Supplier| | |
|------------- -|--------|------------------------|--------------------------|
| | | | |
| BT-BS-611 | 11851 | Strap Wrench | Removal and Installation |
| TG-70 | 11851 | Strap Wrench | of the backshells |
| 600-400 | 06324 | Torque Wrench | |
| | 11851 | | |
| | | | |
| M81969/8-05 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga. | Removal and Insertion of |
| M81969/8-06 | 11851 | Removal Tool 20 ga. | the contacts |
| M81969/14/02 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion | |
| | 11851 | Tool 16 ga. | |

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 1
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |Supplier| | |
|------------- -|--------|------------------------|--------------------------|
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| | | | |
| M81969/14/03 | F0225 | Removal and Insertion | Removal and Insertion of |
| | 11851 | Tool 20 ga. | the contacts |
| | 14283 | | |
| | 49367 | | |
| MS27495A16 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 16 ga. | Removal and Insertion of |
| MS27495A20 | 11851 | Insertion Tool 20 ga. | the contacts |
| | | | |
| 45092 | 30119 | Strip Master Wire | Manually remove the |
| | | Stripper 16 thru 20 ga.| insulation from the |
| | | | cable and wire |
| | | | |
| M22520/1-01 | 11851 | Crimp Tool Frame | Crimp the contacts to |
| | 58164 | | wires |
| M22520/1-02 | 11851 | Crimp Tool Locator, | Crimp the contacts to |
| | 58164 | 16 ga. | wires |
| M22520/1-04 | 11851 | Crimp Tool Locator, | |
| | 58164 | 20 ga. | |
| | | | |
| Model 160B | 80164 | Digital Multimeter | Use to measure |
| Model 260 | 16902 | Ohmmeter | continuity and point-to- |
| | | | point circuits |
| | | | |
| Model 1863 | 24655 | Megohmmeter | Use to measure |
| | | | insulation resistance |
| | | | |
| HT210-16 | 11851 | Retention Test Tool | Use to test the 16 ga. |
| 67-016-02 | 11851 | Replacement Pin Tip | contact retention |
| 68-016-01 | 11851 | Replacement Socket Tip | |
| | | | |
| HT210-20 | 11851 | Retention Test Tool | Use to test the 20 ga. |
| 67-020-02 | 11851 | Replacement Pin Tip | contact retention. |
| 68-020-01 | 11851 | Replacement Socket Tip | |
| | | | |
|_______________|________|________________________|__________________________|

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3. ___________________
Consumable Material
_________________________________________________________
| | Supplier | |
|________________________|__________|_____________________|
| | | |
| Scotch No. 361 | 04963 | Tape, glass cloth. |
| 20-90426-13 | 0ABG9 | Braid, Knit mesh. |
|________________________|__________|_____________________|
4. _________________________
Shielded Wire Replacement
A. Procedure
(1) You can replace a damaged or an open circuit cable with a new
unshielded or shielded cable that you can put along the outer edge of
the harness assembly. This can be used to replace a 2-wire and 3-wire
cable.
(2) Refer to the 92-90 Master Wire List for the correct repair wire gage,
length, and type.
(3) Install the new cable.
(a) Put one end of the new wire so it extends up to 152.4 mm (6 in.)
more than the end of the connector.
(b) Tape the wire to the connector.
(c) Put the wire along the outer edge of the harness assembly to the
connector at the other end of the damaged wire.
(d) Extend the wire up to 152.4 mm (6 in.) more than the end of the
connector and cut the wire.
(e) Apply a small piece of tape to the wire at each end. Write on the
tape the connector contact number of the wire to be replaced.
(f) Install the new cable in all the clamps which holds the harness
to the engine. If the clamp will not hold the new wire, tie the
new wire to the harness assembly with lacing tape.
(4) Disconnect the two harness connectors that contain the damaged wire

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(5) Remove the backshell from each connector.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(a) Remove the lockwire from the shell, strain relief clamp and
coupling nut, and the two screws.
(b) Remove or loosen the screws from the strain relief clamp and
coupling nut.
(c) Remove the strain relief clamp and coupling nut from the
backshell with a PN BT-BS-611 or TG-70 Strap Wrench.
(d) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut to the rear over
the cables. If applicable, remove the glass cloth tape under the
strain relief clamp.
(e) Refer to figure for the correct backshell application.
(f) Move the grounding ferrule or the washer, ring, split ring, and
tube to the rear over the cables enough to permit the shell to be
removed.
(g) Make a mark on the connector backshell in relation to the

connector master keyway if the backshell is other than a straight
type.
(h) Remove the coupling nut from the connector with a strap wrench.
Move the shell to the rear over the cables.
(6) Remove the contact from the connectors.

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) Use the applicable contact removal tool that is listed in the
NOTE : All the power plant connector contacts (pin/sockets) are

____
(b) Remove the contact (pin/socket) as follows:
1
_ Place the contact removal tool on the wire.
2
_ Move the tool back on the wire while you hold against the wire
at the connector opening. The wire will move into the slot of
the tool.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Backshell Removal.
Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Removal.
Figure 002

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

3
_ Push the tool along the wire into the rear of the connector
until it touches the bottom of the connector.
NOTE : When the tool touches the bottom of the connector it

____
will expand the collet from the contact to permit the
contact to be released from the connector.
4
_ While you keep light pressure on the tool, hold the wire
against the serrated shoulder of the tool and remove both the
wired contact and tool.
5
_ Do steps 1_ thru 4_ until you remove the contact from the
other connector.
(7) Put the new wire into and through the backshell detail parts.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(8) If applicable, unwrap the knit mesh braid strip as necessary to

install the new wire under the knit mesh. Wrap the cable with the PN
20-90426-13 Mesh Braid Strip by the figure.
(9) Cut the new wire egual with the damaged wire length and the braided
shield length.
(10) Cut the contacts from the two ends of the damaged cable. Cut the old
cable so that the ends of the cable are outside of the first cable
clamps.
(11) Strip the wire insulation 7. mm (0.276 in.) from the end of the new
wire with a PN 45092 Mechanical Wire Stripper.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NOTE : When the 20 gage wire is used in a size 16 gage contact crimp
____
barrel, filler wire must be inserted along with the 20 gage
wire conductor. Use enough filler wire to make sure you have a
correct pull test when the barrel is crimped.
(12) Crimp the contact

(Ref. Fig. 003)
(a) Use the applicable crimp tool frame and locator given in the
standard equipment for the correct wire gage.
NOTE : Refer to Chapter 70-71-10 for the correct contact

____
(pin/socket) part number.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Wire Stripping and Contact Crimping.

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(b) Install the crimp tool positioner to the crimp tool frame as
follows:
1
_ Remove the lock clip from the lock ring on the positioner.
2
_ Use the correct positioner which agrees with the contact gage
size to be crimped.
3
_ Put the positioner on the tool frame lock plate with the
positioner pins aligned with the lockplate ring slots.
4
_ Push the positioner into the tool frame and turn the
positioner 90 degrees in a clockwise direction until you get a
positive lock.
5
_ Install the lock clip to the positioner lock ring.
(c) Crimp the contact to the wire as follows:
1
_ Raise and turn the tool frame selector knob until the number
of the knob agrees with the number on the positioners data
plate for the correct wire size. Align the number on the knob
to the index mark on the tool frame and release the knob.
CAUTION: IF THE TOOL FRAME SELECTOR KNOB IS PUT IN THE WRONG POSITION, DAMAGE
TO THE CONTACT AND WIRE CAN OCCUR. ALSO THE CONTACT CAN BE LOOSELY
CRIMPED ON THE WIRE.
2
_ Examine the wire to make sure the wire strands are not
separated. Carefully twist the wire strands in their normal
direction of twist to fit the contact wire hole.
3
_ Install the stripped end of the wire into the contact wire
hole.
4
_ Push the wire into the contact wire hole until you feel it
touch the bottom.
NOTE : If the wire was incorrectly stripped, the wire will not
____
touch the bottom of the crimp barrel or there will be
too much bare wire at the rear shoulder of the barrel.
5
_ Install the contact and stripped wire end through the tool
frame hole and into the positioner hole.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

6
_ Squeeze the tool frame handles together until the ratchet
releases.
NOTE : If too much or too little force is needed to squeeze

____
the tool frame handles together, the contact is not
crimped correctly.
Look at the crimp tool for the correct postion for the
wire and contact size.
You cannot open the tool frame until the full crimp is
completed.
7
_ Remove the crimped contact.
8
_ Do steps 1_ thru 7_ until you crimp the contact on the other
end of the wire.
(13) Contact continuity test.
(a) Do a continuity test on the replaced harness assembly contacts

from point- -to-point. Use a Model 160B Digital Multimeter or a
Model 260 Ohmmeter or equivalent.
NOTE : The detailed wiring data from Termination A to Termination

____
B is found in the 92-20 Hook-Up Lists/Plugs and
Receptacles.
(b) Each circuit must have continuity from Termination A to

Termination B on each contact.

(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Make sure the backshell detail parts were not removed from the
cable assembly.
(b) If the detail parts were removed, install the parts on the cable
assembly by the applicable illustration.
(Ref. Fig. 001)

____
connector after the contacts are installed in the
connector.
(c) Use the applicable contact insertion tool given in the standard
equipment for the correct contact gage.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 10
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Contact Insertion.
Figure 004

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 11
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(d) Move the backshell detail parts to the rear over the cable
assembly to permit the contacts to be inserted in the connector.
(e) Install the insertion tool on the contact.

(Ref. Fig. 004)
1
_ Put the wire between the slot and squeeze the wire into the
slot at the tool tip. Make sure the wire is in the slot at the
tool tip.
2
_ Pull the wire back through the tool until the tip seats on the
(f) Install the contact into the connector.

(Ref. Fig. 004)
1
_ Hold the connector in your hand.
CAUTION : IF TOO MUCH PRESSURE IS USED WHEN YOU INSTALL THE CONTACT INTO THE
2
_ Install the wired contact into the cavity at the rear of the
connector with a strong and equal pressure.
3
_ When the contact is properly locked in the connector, a light
NOTE : The click sound is made by the tines on the collet as

____
they lock in position behind the contact shoulder. This
locks the contact in the connector collet.
4
_ Lightly pull back on the wire to feel if the contact is locked
in the collet.
5
_ Remove the tool.
6
_ Do steps 1_ thru 5_ to install the contact in the other
connector.
(15) Contact retention test.
(a) Do a test on each contact to make sure it has a retention force

of 7 to 13 lbs (31.1 to 57.8N).

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 12
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

CAUTION : EXERCICE CARE WHEN TESTING CONTACTS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CONTACT,
(b) Use the applicable retention test tools and replacement pin and
(c) Put the 16 or 20 gage retention test tool and replacement tip on
the contact so they are in a straight line.
1
_ Use the pin replacement tips when you do a test of the socket
contacts.
2
_ Use the socket replacement tips when you do a test of the pin
contacts.
(d) Hold this position when you do a test on each contact. This will
give the most accurate retention force reading.
(e) With the retention test tool in position on the contact do the
test that follows:
1
_ Apply pressure on the tool until a minimum of half of the
2
_ At this point, 10 lbs (44.5 N) pressure has been applied.
3
_ If the contact is still firmly held in the same position, the
(f) Do steps (a) thru (e) to test the other contact.
(16) Install the backshell to the connector.

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(a) Refer to figure for the correct backshell application.
(b) Move the coupling nut and shell forward over the cables.
(c) Align the mark you made before on the backshell with the
connector master keyway.

____
connector and the backshell when you install the harness
on the engine.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 13
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(d) Install the coupling nut to the connector and tighten with a PN
BT-BS111 or TG-70 Strap Wrench.
(e) Move the grounding ferrule or the tube, split ring, and washer
forward over the cables and into the shell. Make sure the knit
mesh strip goes outside the tube and split ring, but under the
ring, washer and strain relief clamp and coupling nut. Make sure
the wire braid is held under the grounding ferrule.
(f) Move the strain relief clamp and coupling nut forward over the
cables to the shell.
(g) Install the coupling nut on the shell.
(h) If applicable, wrap a piece of Scotch No. 361 Tape around the
cable under the strain relief clamp and coupling nut.
(i) Torque the coupling nut to 10 lbf.in. (1.13 Nm) with a strap
wrench and a PN 600-400 Torque Wrench.
(j) Make sure all of the twists and bends are out of the cable.
(k) Wrap the cable under the strain relief clamp with PN Scotch No.
361 Tape for the correct build-up under the clamp.
(l) Tighten the two screws on the clamp.
(m) Torque the two screws 10 to 20 lbf.in. (1.13 to 2.26 Nm).
(17) Backshell continuity test.
(a) Do a continuity test on the backshell to the connector and the

backshell to the shield termination point. Use a Model 160B
Digital Multimeter or equivalent.
(b) The resistance must be no more than 0.01 ohm.
(18) Do an insulation resistance test on all the repaired circuits. Use

Model 1863 Megohmmeter or equivalent.
CAUTION : YOU MUST DISCONNECT ALL THE CONNECTORS WHICH HAVE A RELATION TO THE
CIRCUITS IN THE CONNECTOR THAT IS TESTED. FAILURE TO DO THIS WILL
CAUSE UNSATISFACTORY RESISTANCE INDICATIONS AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO
THE CIRCUITS.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 14
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(a) Do the insulation resistance test between each pair of wires that
have been repaired.
(b) Set the megohmmeter to the 100 volt DC scale.
(c) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the contact (pin or
socket) of one of the repaired wires. Connect the other test lead
to the contact (pin or socket) of the other repaired wire.
(d) The resistance should be infinity.
(e) Do the insulation resistance test between each repaired wire and
the braided shield.
(f) The resistance must be a minimum of 20 megohms.
(g) Do the insulation resistance test between each repaired wire and
the backshell.
(h) Set the megohmmeter to the 500 volt DC scale.
(i) Connect one test lead of the megohmmeter to the backshell body of
the connector. Connect the other test lead to the contact (pin or
socket) of the connector.
(j) The resistance must be a minimum of 20 megohms.
(19) Lockwire the backshell by the procedure given in Chapter 20-71-13.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-24

Page 15
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

EGT, T2.6 AND T3 ELECTRICAL HARNESSES TERMINAL LUG REPAIR PROCEDURE
___________________________________________________________________
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
_________________________
1. General
_______
- This chapter gives,the procedure for the replacement of a connector

contact (pin or socket) on a cable assembly. Refer to AWL ATA 92-10 for
connectors and backshell part numbers and ATA 92-20 for pin numbers
equipment list. Refer to Chapter 70-71-12 for the connector contact/insert
arrangement.
items.
2. __________________
Standard Equipment
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Part No. | Supplier | Nomenclature | Application |
| | code | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 25-3085 | OABG9 | Crimp Tool | Crimp the replacement |
| | | | lug |
R | 46988 | K1636 | Crimp Tool | Crimp the replacement|
R | | | | lug |
| HT900B | 06090 | Heat Tool (compressed air | Heat shrink the |
| or | | and nitrogen) | sleeves |
| HT920B | | | |
| or | | | continuity |
| Model 260 | 16902 | Ohmmeter | |
| Model D-16 | 53655 | Indicator, Combustible | Test the fuel vapor |
| or | | Gas | concentration |
| Model M-6 | 2R306 | Indicator, Combustible | |
| or | | Gas | |
| Model 2A | 40912 | Indicator, Combustible | |
| or | | Gas | |
| Model 40 | 40912 | Indicator, Combustible | |
| | | Gas | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 1
Nov 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

3. ____________________
Consumable Material.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Part No. | Supplier Code | Designation |
| | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 2A1440 | 94021 | Terminal Lug (AL) |
| 2A1441 | 94021 | Terminal Lug (CR) |
| RT1146 | 06090 | Sleeve, Heat Shrink (3/8 in. diameter) |
| No. 92 | 04963 | Insulation Tape, polyamide film, |
| | | thermosetting silicone |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Replacement
______________________________________________________________
of the Damaged Exhaust-Gas Temperature (EGT) or T3
Electrical-harness Terminal Lugs.
A. Procedure
(1) Break out the damaged harness terminal lug.

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(2) Open the grip portion of the termination band sufficiently to permit
axial movement in the wire. Remove the fiberglass sleeve until the
weld piece comes into view.
(3) Open the crimp pieces of the damaged terminal lug.
(a) One crimped piece on the conductor.
(b) One crimped piece on the wire insulation.
(4) Carefully remove with a file the weld between the terminal and the
wire sufficiently to permit the terminal lug to be removed.
(5) Make a selection of the appropriate terminal lug for replacement.

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) Move the terminal lug in place on the wire.
(b) Keep a minimum of 0.030 in. (0,762 mm) between the crimp barrel
and the wire insulation.
(c) If necessary, cut the wire insulation sufficiently to keep the

dimension.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 2
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

EGT, T2.6 and T3 Electrical Wire Harnesses Termination Assemblies.

Figure 001

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 3
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

EGT, T2.6 and T3 Electrical Wire Harnesses Terminal Lugs (AL) and (CR)
Positions.
Figure 002

R EFF :

001-012, 014-099,

70-71-25 Page 4
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(d) Crimp the terminal lug in place on the conductor. Use P/N 25-3085
Crimp Tool.
1
_ Crimp one crimp piece over the conductor.
2
_ Crimp one crimp piece over the wire insulation.
(6) Move the fiberglass sleeve over the terminal-lug crimp pieces until
the crimp is not shown
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(7) Crimp the grip piece of the termination band over the wire.
(8) Do a continuity test on the repaired circuit from the terminal lug to
the connector contact. Use a P/N Model 160B Digital Multimeter or a
Model 260 Ohmmeter, or equivalent.
(a) Each circuit must have continuity from one end of the wire to the
other end of the wire.
NOTE : A permanent repair on the termination assembly must be

____
made at a repair facility. The terminal branch wire must
have sufficient lengths to keep the tolerances shown in
the applicable Component Maintenance Manual. You can
remove the crimped lug and install a new permanent lug.
All four thermocouple terminals in the terminal branch
must be replaced to keep the same length in the branch.
You must move the termination band as necessary to keep
the dimensions. If the terminal branch wire length is not
sufficient, the harness or the termination assembly must
be replaced.
5. ________________________________________________________________
Replacement of the Damaged T2.6 Electrical-Harness Terminal Lugs
A. Procedure
(1) Break out the damaged harness terminal lug

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(2) Carefully remove the heat shrink sleeve until the weld piece comes
into view.
(3) Open the crimp pieces of the damaged terminal lug.
(a) One crimped piece on the conductor.
(b) One crimped piece on the wire insulation.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 5
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(4) Carefully remove with a file the weld between the terminal lug and
the wire sufficiently to permit the terminal to be removed.
(5) Make a selection of the appropriate terminal lug for replacement.

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) Move the terminal lug in place on the wire.
(b) Keep a minimum of 0.030 in. (0,762 mm) between the crimp barrel
and the wire insulation.
(c) If necessary, cut the wire insulation sufficiently to maintain

the dimension.
(d) Crimp the terminal lug in place. Use a P/N 25-3085 Crimp Tool.
1
_ Crimp one crimp piece over the conductor.
2 Crimp one crimp piece over the wire insulation.

_
WARNING : DO NOT USE ANY HEAT GUN IF THERE ARE FUEL OR FUEL VAPORS AS
DETERMINED BY A COMBUSTIBLE INDICATOR. HEAT GUNS ARE A SOURCE OF
COMBUSTION.
FUEL OR FUEL VAPORS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH TO THE PERSON.
DO NOT USE ANY HEAT GUN ON AN AIRPLANE WHEN PASSENGERS ARE ABOARD,
WHEN THE AIRPLANE IS IN THE AIRPORT TERMINAL AREA OR IN A HANGAR.
DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES RELEASED FROM THE HEAT SHRINK SLEEVE WHEN
YOU DO THE SHRINKING PROCESS. THE FUMES CAN CAUSE INJURY TO THE
PERSON.
USE SUFFICIENT VENTILATION TO REMOVE FUMES RELEASED FROM THE HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE AND TO KEEP THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT AND SURROUNDING
AREA FREE OF FUEL VAPORS.
6. Fuel
_______________
Vapor Test
- Do a fuel vapor test and use a Combustible Gas Indicator
7. ______________________________
Insulation of the Terminal Lug
A. Procedure
- The terminal lug can be insulated when you use the tape wrap or heat
shrink sleeve
(1) Do the procedure in step (3) when you insulate the terminal lug with
the tape wrap.
(2) Do the procedure in step (4) when you insulate and support the
terminal lug with the heat shrink sleeve.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 6
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

(3) Wrap one layer of P/N No. 92 Insulation tape around the terminal lug
and make a 20 percent overlap on each wrap of the tape. Extend the
tape to 0.500 in. (12,7 mm) on to the metal braid.
(4) Heat shrink the sleeve on the crimped terminal lug. Use the P/N
HT900B or HT920B Compressed Air and Nitrogen Heating Tool as follows:
(a) Cut a piece of P/N RT1146 Heat Shrink Sleeve to the correct
length and install the sleeve on the wire.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(b) Move the heat shrink sleeve over the crimped part of the terminal
lug.
(c) Attach the heat reflector to the heating tool.
(d) Make the contour of the heat reflector to be one inch (25,4 mm)
between the reflector and the heat shrink sleeve.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(e) Use protection on all wires and other items than can be damaged
by heat with applicable heat shields.
(f) Apply heat to the tool for one minute before you shrink the
sleeve.
(g) Apply heat to the sleeve and shrink the sleeve into place. Do not
apply heat to the sleeve for more than 20 seconds at any one
location.
(h) If the sleeve did not properly shrink in place after 20 seconds,
decrease the temperature and shrink the sleeve as follows.
- Decrease the temperature of the wire assembly for a minimum of
five minutes.
- Apply heat to the sleeve for a maximum of 20 seconds.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 7
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

Heat Tool (Heat Reflector Contour).

Figure 003

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 8
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

8. _______________________________
Testing of the Repaired Circuit
A. Procedure
Do a continuity test on the repaired circuit from the terminal lug to the
connector contact. Use a P/N Model 160B Digital Multimeter or a Model 260
Ohmmeter, or equivalent
(1) Each circuit must have continuity from one end of the wire to the
NOTE : A permanent repair on the termination assembly must be made at

____
a repair facility. The terminal branch wire must have
sufficient lengths to keep the tolerances specified in the
applicable Component Maintenance Manual. You can remove the
crimped lug and install a new permanent lug. All four
thermocouple terminals in the terminal branch must be replaced
to keep the same length in the branch. You must move the
termination band as necessary to keep the dimensions. If the
terminal branch wire length is not sufficient, the harness of
the termination assembly must be replaced.

R

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-25

Page 9
May 01/06

IAC

I A E

V2500

TERMINAL LUG REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
______________________________________________________________
1. General
_______
- This chapter gives the procedure for the replacement of a terminal lug.
The cables are of sufficient length to let the terminal lugs be replaced
two times only. If it becomes necessary to replace the terminal lug a
third time, disassemble the harness and replace the applicable cable.
Refer to Chapter 70-71-24.
items.
2. __________________
Standard Equipment
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Part Number | Supplier | Nomenclature | Application |
| | Code | | |
|------------------|----------|----------------------|------------------------|
| 25-3085 | OABG9 | Crimp Tool | Crimp the replacement |
| | | | lug |
R | HT900B | 06090 | Heat Tool | Heat shrink the |
R | or | | (compressed air and | sleeves |
R | HT920B | | nitrogen) | |
R | | | | |
R | or | | | continuity |
R | Model 260 | 16902 | Ohmmeter | |
R | Model D-16 | 53655 | Indicator, | Test the fuel vapor |
R | or | | Combustible Gas | concentration |
R | Model M-6 | 2R306 | Indicator, | |
R | or | | Combustible Gas | |
R | Model 2A | 40912 | Indicator, | |
R | or | | Combustible Gas | |
R | Model 40 | 40912 | Indicator, | |
R | | | Combustible Gas | |
R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-26

Page 1
Aug 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

3. ___________________
Consumable Material
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R | Part Number | Supplier Code | Designation |
| | | |
|--------------|---------------|----------------------------------------------|
R | V06-131 | 86874 | Marking Pen |
R | 323161 | 94021 | Terminal Lug |
R | 322338 | K1636 | Terminal Lug |
| HTMS1/4-48 | 06090 | Sleeve, Heat Shrink |
R | or | | |
R | Equivalent | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R 4. Replacement
___________________________________________________
of the Electrical-Harness Terminal Lugs
R (Ref. Fig. 001, 002)
A. Procedure
(1) Prepare the cable end.
(a) Cut the cable adjacent to terminal lug and discard the terminal
lug.
(b) Remove 0.39in. (10mm) of the outer installation sheath of the

cable.
(c) Pull back the ground screen from the cable end.
(d) Remove 0.28in. (7mm) of the inner cable insulation sheath.
(e) Pull the ground screen over the cable inner conductors and twist
R together the screen and the inner conductors.
(2) Install the new terminal lug.
(a) Install the terminal lug on the cable end.
(b) Make sure that the terminal lug barrel is fully around the outer
sheath of the cable.
(c) Crimp the terminal lug in place on the cable. Use P/N 25-3085
Crimp Tool.

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-26

Page 2
Aug 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

R Terminal Lug Replacement

Figure 001

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-26

Page 3
Aug 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

R Heat Tool (Heat Reflector Contour)

R Figure 002

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-26

Page 4
Aug 01/07

IAC

I A E

V2500

WARNING: DO NOT USE ANY HEAT GUN IF THERE ARE FUEL OR FUEL VAPORS AS DETERMINED
BY A COMBUSTIBLE INDICATOR. HEAT GUNS ARE A SOURCE OF COMBUSTION. FUEL
OR FUEL VAPORS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH TO THE PERSON. DO NOT USE ANY
HEAT GUN ON AN AIRPLANE WHEN PASSENGERS ARE ABOARD, WHEN THE AIRPLANE
IS IN THE AIRPORT TERMINAL AREA OR IN A HANGAR.
DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES RELEASED FROM THE HEAT SHRINK SLEEVE WHEN YOU
DO THE SHRINKING PROCESS. THE FUMES CAN CAUSE INJURY TO THE PERSON.
USE SUFFICIENT VENTILATION TO REMOVE FUMES RELEASED FROM THE HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE AND TO KEEP THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT AND SURROUNDING AREA
FREE OF FUEL VAPORS.
(3) Fuel Vapor test.
(a) Do a fuel vapor test and use a Combustible Gas Indicator.
(4) Install the heat shrink sleeve.
(a) Cut a 0.78in. (20mm) length of the heat shrink sleeve.
(b) Install the heat shrink sleeve on the cable and the barrel of the
terminal lug.
R (c) Install the reflector on the heat tool HT900B or HT920B.
(d) Set the heat tool to give air at a temperature of 620 deg.F (327
deg.C).
(e) Use the heat tool to heat shrink the sleeve on to the cable and
terminal lug barrel.
(5) Do a continuity test on the repaired circuit from the terminal lug to
R the connector contact. Use a P/N Model 160B Digital Multimeter or a
R Model 260 Ohmmeter, or equivalent.
(a) Each circuit must have continuity from one end of the wire to the

EFF :

001-012, 014-099, 70-71-26

Page 5
Aug 01/07

IAC

Nammiaca 000038

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Nammiaca 000038

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

REVISION NO. 57 May 01/08

L.E.P. 1- 3 REVISED TO REFLECT THIS REVISION INDICATING

70-11-56 CORRECTION/ADDITION/AMPLIFICATION 001-012, 014-099,

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE CH/SE/SU C PAGE DATE

RECORD 70-11-50 202 May01/06 70-23-13 208 May01/06

70-30-00 234 Feb01/08 70-35-08 810 May01/06 70-40-11 215 May01/06

70-52-11 229 May01/06 70-71-12 11 May01/06 70-71-21 12 May01/06

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

POWER PLANT WIRING STANDARD PRACTICES - 70-71-00

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINES

(1) Data related to the on-aircraft maintenance of the propulsion system

(a) Troubleshooting (Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual).

(b) Maintenance Practices.

(d) Removal/Installation of Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) and of the

(h) Approved Repairs.

(2) The chapter numbers and designations used are as follows:

(a) 05-Time Limits.

(b) 06-Dimensions and Areas.

(c) 11-Placards and Markings.

(f) 24-Electrical Power.

(g) 26-Fire Protection.

(h) 29-Hydraulic Power.

(i) 30-Ice and Rain Protection.

(k) 54-Nacelles and Pylons.

(l) 70-Standard Practices - Engines.

(m) 71-Power Plant.

(o) 73-Engine Fuel and Control.

(r) 76-Engine Controls.

(s) 77-Engine Indicating.

(3) Data that refers to location, description and operation of the

(4) Data related to safety procedures, standard on-aircraft procedures

(5) Related Publications

(a) Propulsion System Operating Instructions (Refer to Flight Crew

(b) Aircraft Plant Illustrated Parts Catalog (AIPC) - The Illustrated

(c) Illustrated Tool and Equipment Manual (Refer to Illustrated Tool

(d) Non-Destructive Test Manual (Refer to NDT).

(f) IAE - Component Maintenance Manuals - These four manuals

(g) Wiring Data (Refer to ESPM) - The Electrical Standard Practices

(h) Vendor Component Maintenance Manuals - The various Vendor

(i) Engine/Nacelle Service Bulletins - Engine Service Bulletins

(7) Engine Area Identification

C. List of VRS (V2500 Repair Scheme) used in AMM

VRS1011 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR ANNULUS 72-31-11 801

VRS1012 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR ANNULUS 72-31-11 801

VRS1020 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADES 72-31-11 801

VRS1030 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADE 72-31-11 801

VRS1058 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR BLADES AND 72-31-11 801

VRS1063 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR FAN BLADE 72-31-11 801

VRS1065 REPAIR LEADING EDGE EROSION AND THE LP 72-31-11 801

VRS1113 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR 72-31-11 801

VRS1148 REPLACEMENT OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK REAR 72-31-12 801

VRS1149 REPAIR OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK TOUCH UP 72-31-12 801

VRS1174 REPLACEMENT OF THE STAGE 1 FAN DISK 72-31-12 801

VRS1175 REPLACEMENT OF THE SHANK NUTS OF THE 72-31-13 801

VRS1290 REPAIR OF THE LP COMPRESSOR STUB SHAFT 72-32-51 801

VRS1405 REPAIR OF THE FAN CASE 72-32-85 801

VRS1408 LOCAL REPAIR OF ACOUSTIC LINING 72-32-85 801